Onkyo Pr Sc885 Users Manual SC885_En

Onkyo-Pr-Sc885P-Owner-S-Manual onkyo-pr-sc885p-owner-s-manual

Onkyo-Pr-Sc885-Owner-S-Manual onkyo-pr-sc885-owner-s-manual

PR-SC885 to the manual 94b04901-b199-434b-8436-e1cbc815a8ff

2015-01-24

: Onkyo Onkyo-Pr-Sc885-Users-Manual-233091 onkyo-pr-sc885-users-manual-233091 onkyo pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 128 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Important Safety Instructions
Features
Supplied Accessories
Multiroom Capability
Getting to Know the AV Controller
- Front Panel
- Display
- Rear Panel
Remote Controller
- Installing the Batteries
- Using the Remote Controller
- About the Remote Controller Modes
- RECEIVER/TAPE Mode
- DVD Mode
- CD/MD/CDR Modes
- DOCK Mode
Connecting a Power Amplifier and Speakers
- Enjoying Home Theater
- Connecting Your Speakers
- Connecting a Power Amplifier with RCA Inputs
- Connecting a Power Amplifier with XLR Inputs
- Bi-amping the Front Speakers
Connecting Antennas
- Connecting the Indoor FM Antenna
- Connecting the AM Loop Antenna
- Connecting an Outdoor FM Antenna
- Connecting an Outdoor AM Antenna
Connecting Your Components
- About AV Connections
- Connecting Audio and Video Signals to the AV Controller
- Which Connections Should I Use?
- Connecting a TV or Projector
- Connecting a DVD player
- Connecting a VCR or DVR for Playback
- Connecting a VCR or DVR for Recording
- Connecting a Satellite, Cable, or Terrestrial Set-top box or Other Video Source
- Connecting Components with HDMI
- Connecting a Game Console
- Connecting a Camcorder or Other AV Component
- Connecting a CD Player
- Connecting a Turntable
- Connecting a Cassette, CDR, MiniDisc, or DAT Recorder
- Connecting a Balanced Audio Source
- Connecting an RI Dock
- Connecting the Power Cords of Other Components
- Connecting Onkyo Components
- Connecting the Power Cord
Turning On the AV Controller
- Turning On and Standby
First Time Setup
- Speaker Settings
- HDMI Monitor Setup
- HDMI Input Setup
- Component Video Input Setup
- Changing the Input Display
- Digital Input Setup
- Analog Input Setup
- Automatic Speaker Setup (AudysseyMultEQ XT)
Playing Your AV Components
- Basic AV Controller Operation
Listening to the Radio
- Listening to AM/FM Stations
- Listening to HD Radio™ Stations
- Listening to XM Satellite Radio®
- Listening to SIRIUS Satellite Radio®
- Presetting AM, FM, XM, and SIRIUS Stations
Common Functions
- Setting the Display Brightness
- Adjusting Speaker Levels
- Muting the AV Controller
- Using the Sleep Timer
- Using Headphones
- Displaying Source Information
- Selecting Audio Inputs
- Specifying the Digital Signal Format
Using the Listening Modes
- Selecting the Listening Modes
- Listening Modes Available for Each Source Format
- About the Listening Modes
Recording
- Recording the Input Source
- Recording from Different AV Sources
Onscreen Setup Menus
- Menu Map
Adjusting the Listening Modes
- Using the Re-EQ Function
- Using the Late Night Function
- Audio Adjust
- Listening Mode Presets
Advanced Setup
- Speaker Setup
- Source Setup
- Miscellaneous Setup
- Hardware Setup
- Lock Setup
Zone2 and Zone3
- Connecting Zone2
- Connecting Zone3
- Zone2/Zone3 Out Settings
- Using Zone 2 and Zone3
- Using the 12V Triggers
- Using the Remote Controller in Zone2/3 and Multiroom Control Kits
Controlling Other Components
- Entering Remote Control Codes
- Resetting the Remote Controller
- Learning Commands
- Using Macros
Troubleshooting
Specifications

AV Controller

PR-SC885

Instruction Manual

Thank you for purchasing an Onkyo AV controller.

Please read this manual thoroughly before making

connections and plugging in the unit.

Following the instructions in this manual will enable

you to obtain optimum performance and listening

enjoyment from your new AV controller.

Please retain this manual for future reference.

Contents

Introduction ..................................... 2

Connection .................................... 19

Turning On & First Time Setup..... 43

Basic Operation

Playing your AV components....... 57

Listening to the Radio.................. 58

Enjoying the Listening Modes ..... 79

Advanced Operation ..................... 94

Troubleshooting .......................... 121

PR-SC885_En.book Page 1 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Important Safety Instructions

1. Read these instructions.

2. Keep these instructions.

3. Heed all warnings.

4. Follow all instructions.

5. Do not use this apparatus near water.

6. Clean only with dry cloth.

7. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in

accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

8. Do not install near any heat sources such as radia-

tors, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus

(including ampliﬁers) that produce heat.

9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or

grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two

blades with one wider than the other. A grounding

type plug has two blades and a third grounding

prong. The wide blade or the third prong are pro-

vided for your safety. If the provided plug does not

ﬁt into your outlet, consult an electrician for

replacement of the obsolete outlet.

10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or

pinched particularly at plugs, convenience recepta-

cles, and the point where they exit from the appara-

tus.

11. Only use attachments/accessories speciﬁed by the

manufacturer.

12.

Use only with the cart, stand,

tripod, bracket, or table spec-

iﬁed by the manufacturer, or

sold with the apparatus.

When a cart is used, use cau-

tion when moving the cart/

apparatus combination to

avoid injury from tip-over.

13. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or

when unused for long periods of time.

14. Refer all servicing to qualiﬁed service personnel.

Servicing is required when the apparatus has been

damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or

plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects

have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has

been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate

normally, or has been dropped.

15. Damage Requiring Service

Unplug the apparatus from the wall outlet and refer

servicing to qualiﬁed service personnel under the

following conditions:

A. When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged,

B. If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen

into the apparatus,

C. If the apparatus has been exposed to rain or

water,

D. If the apparatus does not operate normally by

following the operating instructions. Adjust only

those controls that are covered by the operating

instructions as an improper adjustment of other

controls may result in damage and will often

require extensive work by a qualiﬁed technician

to restore the apparatus to its normal operation,

E. If the apparatus has been dropped or damaged in

any way, and

F. When the apparatus exhibits a distinct change in

performance this indicates a need for service.

16. Object and Liquid Entry

Never push objects of any kind into the apparatus

through openings as they may touch dangerous volt-

age points or short-out parts that could result in a

ﬁre or electric shock.

The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or

splashing and no objects ﬁlled with liquids, such as

vases shall be placed on the apparatus.

Don’t put candles or other burning objects on top of

this unit.

17. Batteries

Always consider the environmental issues and fol-

low local regulations when disposing of batteries.

18. If you install the apparatus in a built-in installation,

such as a bookcase or rack, ensure that there is ade-

quate ventilation.

Leave 20 cm (8") of free space at the top and sides

and 10 cm (4") at the rear. The rear edge of the shelf

or board above the apparatus shall be set 10 cm (4")

away from the rear panel or wall, creating a ﬂue-like

gap for warm air to escape.

WARNING:

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC

SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS

TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

CAUTION:

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,

DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO

USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER

SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE

PERSONNEL.

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an

equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the

presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within

the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient

magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to

persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is

intended to alert the user to the presence of important

operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in

the literature accompanying the appliance.

WARNING

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE

NE PAS

OUVRIR

AVIS

PORTABLE CART WARNING

S3125A

PR-SC885_En.book Page 2 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Precautions

1. Recording Copyright

—Unless it’s for personal use

only, recording copyrighted material is illegal with-

out the permission of the copyright holder.

2. AC Fuse

—The AC fuse inside the unit is not user-

serviceable. If you cannot turn on the unit, contact

the dealer from whom you purchased this unit.

3. Care

—Occasionally you should dust the unit all

over with a soft cloth. For stubborn stains, use a soft

cloth dampened with a weak solution of mild deter-

gent and water. Dry the unit immediately afterwards

with a clean cloth. Don’t use abrasive cloths, thin-

ners, alcohol, or other chemical solvents, because

they may damage the ﬁnish or remove the panel let-

tering.

4. Power

WARNING

BEFORE PLUGGING IN THE UNIT FOR THE

FIRST TIME, READ THE FOLLOWING SEC-

TION CAREFULLY.

AC outlet voltages vary from country to country.

Make sure that the voltage in your area meets the

voltage requirements printed on the unit’s rear panel

(e.g., AC 230 V, 50 Hz or AC 120 V, 60 Hz).

The power cord plug is used to disconnect this unit

from the AC power source. Make sure that the plug

is readily operable (easily accessible) at all times.

For North American model

Pressing the [STANDBY/ON] button to select

Standby mode does not fully shutdown the unit. If

you do not intend to use the unit for an extended

period, remove the power cord from the AC outlet.

5. Never Touch this Unit with Wet Hands

—Never

handle this unit or its power cord while your hands

are wet or damp. If water or any other liquid gets

inside this unit, have it checked by the dealer from

whom you purchased this unit.

6. Handling Notes

• If you need to transport this unit, use the original

packaging to pack it how it was when you origi-

nally bought it.

• Do not leave rubber or plastic items on this unit

for a long time, because they may leave marks on

the case.

• This unit’s top and rear panels may get warm

after prolonged use. This is normal.

• If you do not use this unit for a long time, it may

not work properly the next time you turn it on, so

be sure to use it occasionally.

For U.S. models

FCC Information for User

CAUTION:

The user changes or modiﬁcations not expressly

approved by the party responsible for compliance could

void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

NOTE:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply

with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to

Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to

provide reasonable protection against harmful interfer-

ence in a residential installation.

This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio

frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accor-

dance with the instructions, may cause harmful interfer-

ence to radio communications. However, there is no

guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular

installation. If this equipment does cause harmful inter-

ference to radio or television reception, which can be

determined by turning the equipment off and on, the

user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by

one or more of the following measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the equipment and

receiver.

•Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit dif-

ferent from that to which the receiver is connected.

•Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV techni-

cian for help.

For Canadian Models

NOTE:

THIS CLASS B DIGITAL APPARATUS

COMPLIES WITH CANADIAN ICES-003.

For models having a power cord with a polarized plug:

CAUTION:

TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK,

MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT,

FULLY INSERT.

Modèle canadien

REMARQUE:

CET APPAREIL NUMÉRIQUE DE

LA CLASSE B EST CONFORME À LA NORME

NMB-003 DU CANADA.

Sur les modèles dont la ﬁche est polarisée:

ATTENTION:

POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS ÉLEC-

TRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS

LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRE-

SPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER

JUSQU’AU FOND.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 3 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Features

Processing

• THX

Surround EX

• THX Ultra2

certiﬁed

• Dolby

Digital, Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Digital

Plus, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Pro Logic IIx

• DTS

, DTS-ES Discrete, DTS-ES Matrix, DTS-HD

Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution, DTS 96/24,

DTS Neo:6

• Neural Surround

, THX-Neural

• Theater-Dimensional

virtual surround sound

• DSD Direct

• 192 kHz/24-bit D/A converters

•Powerful and highly accurate 32-bit DSP processing

• Re-EQ

function

•Tone control on all channels (7.1)

• 15-band EQ on 7 channels, 5-band EQ on subwoofer

Audio/Video

• Balanced XLR stereo input

• Balanced XLR 7.1-channel preouts, with front bi-

amping capability

• Zone 2 with level, tone, balance, and left, right, and

subwoofer pre outs, and composite video output, and

component video output (assignable).

• Zone 3 with level, balance, and left, right, and sub-

woofer pre outs

•4 HDMI

inputs, 2 outputs (Version 1.3a)

• HDMI upconversion of composite video, S-Video,

and component sources (720p, 1080i, 1080p capable)

• Component video upconversion of composite video

and S-Video sources

• Composite video to S-Video and S-Video to compos-

ite video conversion

•6 digital inputs (3 optical, 3 coaxial), 1 output (optical)

•3 component video inputs, 2 outputs

•6 S-Video inputs, 2 outputs

• RS-232 control

• Color-coded, assignable 7.1 multichannel input

• 7.1-channel pre out (RCA)

Tuner

•XM

Satellite Radio ready

* XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock required; sold separately.

• SIRIUS

Satellite Radio ready

* SiriusConnect Home tuner kit required; sold separately.

• HD Radio

*10

reception

•40 AM/FM/SIRIUS/XM presets

• AM/FM auto tuning

• Direct tuning

Others

• Audyssey MultEQ XT room correction

*11

• Easy-to-use onscreen setup menus

• IR IN A/B and OUT

• 12V TRIGGER OUT A, B, C

• Preprogrammed remote controller for use with other

AV components, with Learning and Macro functions

THX and Ultra2 are trademarks of THX Ltd. THX may be reg-

is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories. Used with permission.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

“Dolby”, “Pro Logic” and the double-D symbol are trademarks

of Dolby Laboratories.

“DTS” is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc., and “DTS-HD

Master Audio” is a trademark of DTS, Inc.

Neural Surround is a trademark owned by Neural Audio Cor-

poration, THX is a trademark of THX Ltd., which may be reg-

Theater-Dimensional is a trademark of Onkyo Corporation.

*6 Re-Equalization and the “Re-EQ” logo are trademarks of THX

Ltd.

HDMI, the HDMI logo and High Deﬁnition Multimedia Inter-

face are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licens-

ing, LLC.

XM Ready

the SIRIUS dog logo, channel names and logos are trademarks

of SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc. Available only in the contiguous

United States (excluding Alaska and Hawaii) and Canada.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 4 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Features

—Continued

*10

HD Radio

™

Technology Manufactured Under License From

iBiquity Digital Corporation. “iBiquity Digital” and the “HD

Radio” and “HD” Symbols are registered trademarks of iBiq-

uity Digital Corporation. “HD Radio” is a trademark of iBiq-

uity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents.

*11

Manufactured under license from Audyssey Laboratories. U.S.

and foreign patents pending. Audyssey MultEQ XT is a trade-

mark of Audyssey Laboratories.

* “Xantech” is a registered trademark of Xantech Corporation.

* “Niles” is a registered trademark of Niles Audio Corporation.

*Apple and iPod are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., regis-

tered in the U.S. and other countries.

Supplied Accessories

Make sure you have the following accessories:

* In catalogs and on packaging, the letter at the end of the product

name indicates the color. Speciﬁcations and operation are the same

regardless of color.

THX Ultra2

Before any home theater component can be THX

Ultra2 certiﬁed, it must pass a rigorous series of

quality and performance tests. Only then can a prod-

uct feature the THX Ultra2 logo, which is your guar-

antee that the Home Theater products you purchase

will give you superb performance for many years to

come. THX Ultra2 requirements deﬁne hundreds of

parameters, including power ampliﬁer performance,

and pre-ampliﬁer performance and operation for

both digital and analog domains. THX Ultra2 receiv-

ers also feature proprietary THX technologies (e.g.,

THX Mode) which accurately translate movie

soundtracks for home theater playback.

This product incorporates copyright protection tech-

nology that is protected by U.S. patents and other

intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright

protection technology must be authorized by Macro-

vision Corporation, and is intended for home and

other limited consumer uses only unless otherwise

authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or

disassembly is prohibited.

Remote controller and three batteries (AA/R6)

Speaker setup microphone

Indoor FM antenna

AM loop antenna

Power cord

(Power cord varies from country to country.)

PR-SC885_En.book Page 5 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Multiroom Capability

You can use three speaker systems with this AV controller

—a surround-sound speaker system (up to 7.1 channels)

in your main listening room, a stereo speaker system in a second room, or Zone 2, as we call it, and another stereo

speaker system in a third room that we call Zone 3. And, you can select a different audio source for each room.

Main Room:

In your main listening room, you can enjoy up to 7.1-channel playback (see pages 19–23).

You can enjoy the various listening modes such as Dolby, DTS, and THX (pages 79–86).

Zone 2:

In your Zone 2 room, you can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback and video playback (see page 109).

*The listening modes cannot be used with Zone 2 and Zone 3.

*External power ampliﬁer required.

Zone 3:

In your Zone 3 room, you can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback (see page 110).

*The listening modes cannot be used with Zone 2 and Zone 3.

*External power ampliﬁer required.

Surround back left and right

speakers

Main Room

Front left and right speakers

Center speaker

Surround left and right speakers

Subwoofer

Zone 2 Room

Left and right

stereo speakers

Zone 3 Room

Left and right

stereo speakers

PR-SC885_En.book Page 6 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Contents

Features ............................................................ 4

Supplied Accessories ...................................... 5

Multiroom Capability ........................................ 6

Getting to Know the AV Controller ................. 8

Front Panel ...................................................................8

Display .......................................................................10

Rear Panel ..................................................................11

Remote Controller .......................................... 13

Installing the Batteries ...............................................13

Using the Remote Controller .....................................13

About the Remote Controller Modes .........................14

RECEIVER/TAPE Mode ...........................................14

DVD Mode .................................................................16

CD/MD/CDR Modes .................................................17

DOCK Mode ..............................................................18

Connecting a Power Amplifier

and Speakers .................................................. 19

Enjoying Home Theater .............................................19

Connecting Your Speakers ........................................20

Connecting a Power Amplifier with RCA Inputs ......21

Connecting a Power Amplifier with XLR Inputs ......22

Bi-amping the Front Speakers ...................................23

Connecting Antennas .................................... 24

Connecting the Indoor FM Antenna ..........................24

Connecting the AM Loop Antenna ............................24

Connecting an Outdoor FM Antenna .........................25

Connecting an Outdoor AM Antenna ........................25

Connecting Your Components ..................... 26

About AV Connections ..............................................26

Connecting Audio and Video Signals to the AV

Controller ................................................................27

Which Connections Should I Use? ............................27

Connecting a TV or Projector ....................................29

Connecting a DVD player ..........................................30

Connecting a VCR or DVR for Playback ..................32

Connecting a VCR or DVR for Recording ................33

Connecting a Satellite, Cable, or Terrestrial

Set-top box or Other Video Source .........................34

Connecting Components with HDMI ........................35

Connecting a Game Console ......................................37

Connecting a Camcorder or Other AV Component ...38

Connecting a CD Player .............................................39

Connecting a Turntable ..............................................39

Connecting a Cassette, CDR, MiniDisc, or DAT

Recorder ..................................................................40

Connecting a Balanced Audio Source .......................40

Connecting an RI Dock ..............................................41

Connecting the Power Cords of Other Components

...41

Connecting Onkyo Components ........................42

Connecting the Power Cord .......................................42

Turning On the AV Controller ....................... 43

Turning On and Standby ............................................43

First Time Setup ............................................. 44

Speaker Settings .........................................................44

HDMI Monitor Setup .................................................45

HDMI Input Setup .....................................................47

Component Video Input Setup ...................................48

Changing the Input Display .......................................49

Digital Input Setup .....................................................49

Analog Input Setup ....................................................51

Automatic Speaker Setup (Audyssey MultEQ XT) ...52

Playing Your AV Components .......................57

Basic AV Controller Operation .................................57

Listening to the Radio ....................................58

Listening to AM/FM Stations ....................................58

Listening to HD Radio™ Stations .............................60

Listening to XM Satellite Radio

..............................62

Listening to SIRIUS Satellite Radio

........................67

Presetting AM, FM, XM, and SIRIUS Stations ........75

Common Functions ........................................76

Setting the Display Brightness ...................................76

Adjusting Speaker Levels ..........................................76

Muting the AV Controller .........................................76

Using the Sleep Timer ............................................... 77

Using Headphones .....................................................77

Displaying Source Information ..................................77

Selecting Audio Inputs ..............................................78

Specifying the Digital Signal Format ........................78

Using the Listening Modes ............................79

Selecting the Listening Modes ...................................79

Listening Modes Available for

Each Source Format ................................................80

About the Listening Modes .......................................84

Recording ........................................................87

Recording the Input Source .......................................87

Recording from Different AV Sources ......................87

Onscreen Setup Menus ..................................88

Menu Map .................................................................. 88

Adjusting the Listening Modes .....................89

Using the Re-EQ Function .........................................89

Using the Late Night Function ..................................89

Audio Adjust .............................................................. 90

Listening Mode Presets ..............................................92

Advanced Setup ..............................................94

Speaker Setup ............................................................94

Source Setup ............................................................ 101

Miscellaneous Setup ................................................104

Hardware Setup .......................................................106

Lock Setup ............................................................... 108

Zone 2 and Zone 3 ........................................109

Connecting Zone 2 ...................................................109

Connecting Zone 3 ...................................................110

Zone 2/Zone 3 Out Settings .....................................111

Using Zone 2 and Zone 3 .........................................111

Using the 12V Triggers ...........................................114

Using the Remote Controller in Zone 2/3

and Multiroom Control Kits ..................................115

Controlling Other Components ...................116

Entering Remote Control Codes ..............................116

Resetting the Remote Controller .............................117

Learning Commands ................................................119

Using Macros ........................................................... 120

Troubleshooting ...........................................121

Specifications ...............................................124

PR-SC885_En.book Page 7 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Getting to Know the AV Controller

The actual front panel has various logos printed on it. They are not shown here for clarity.

For detailed information, see the pages in parentheses.

STANDBY/ON button (43)

Sets the AV controller to On or Standby.

STANDBY indicator (43)

Lights up when the AV controller is on Standby and

ﬂashes while a signal is being received from the

remote controller.

ZONE 2 indicator (111)

Flashes when Zone 2 is being set. Lights up when

Zone 2 is on.

ZONE 3 indicator (111)

Flashes when Zone 3 is being set. Lights up when

Zone 3 is on.

Remote-control sensor (13)

Receives control signals from the remote controller.

Display

See “Display” on page 10.

DISPLAY button (77)

Displays various information about the currently

selected input source.

MASTER VOLUME control (57)

Sets the volume of the AV controller to –

∞

dB,

–81.5 dB, –81.0 dB through +18.0 dB (relative dis-

play).

The volume level can also be displayed as an abso-

lute value. See “Volume Setup” on page 104.

PURE AUDIO button and indicator (79)

Selects the Pure Audio listening mode. The indica-

tor lights up when this mode is selected. Pressing

this button again selects the previous listening

mode.

AUDIO SEL button (78)

Selects the audio input: analog, digital, HDMI, or

multichannel.

Input selector buttons (57)

Select the following input sources: DVD,

VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME/TV, AUX 1, AUX 2,

TAPE, TUNER, CD, PHONO.

Front Panel

STANDBY/ON

MASTER VOLUME

CDTUNER

TAPECBL/SAT GAME/TV AUX 1 AUX 2VCR/DVR

DVDAUDIO SELPURE AUDIO PHONO DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

STANDBY

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

5 61 2

KJ9

Front ﬂap Push here to open

the ﬂap

PR-SC885_En.book Page 8 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Getting to Know the AV Controller

—Continued

PHONES jack (77)

This 1/4-inch phone jack is for connecting a stan-

dard pair of stereo headphones for private listening.

ZONE 2, ZONE 3, and OFF buttons (112)

The ZONE 2 button is used when setting Zone 2.

The ZONE 3 button is used when setting Zone 3.

The OFF button is used to turn off Zone 2 or

Zone 3.

LEVEL button (112)

Used when adjusting the volume level of Zone 2 or

Zone 3.

TONE button (113)

Used to adjust the tone (bass and treble).

HDMI OUT (46)

Used to set the HDMI Monitor setting.

STEREO button (79)

Selects the Stereo listening mode.

THX button (79)

Selects the THX listening modes.

DIMMER button (76)

Adjusts the display brightness.

MEMORY button (75)

Used when storing or deleting radio presets.

TUNING MODE button (58)

Selects the Auto or Manual tuning mode for AM

and FM radio.

SETUP button

Opens and closes the onscreen setup menus, which

are displayed on the connected TV.

TUNING, PRESET, Arrow, and ENTER

buttons

When AM or FM is selected, the TUNING [ ]

[] buttons are used for radio tuning, and the PRE-

SET [ ] [ ] buttons are used to select radio pre-

sets (see page 75). With the onscreen setup menus,

they work as arrow buttons and are used to select

and set items. The ENTER button is also used with

the onscreen setup menus.

RETURN button

Selects the previously displayed onscreen setup

menu.

SETUP MIC (52)

The automatic speaker setup microphone connects

here.

AUX 2 INPUT (38, 87)

Used to connect a camcorder, game console, and so

on. There are input jacks for optical digital audio,

S-Video, composite video, and analog audio.

Up [ ] and Down [ ] buttons (90, 112)

Used to adjust the tone, and the volume and balance

of Zone 2 and Zone 3.

DIGITAL INPUT button (50)

Used to assign digital inputs to input selectors.

LISTENING MODE [ ]/[ ] buttons (79)

Select the listening modes.

OFF TONE HDMI OUT

DIGITAL INPUT

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

LEVEL

PHONES

STEREO THX

DIMMER MEMORY

LISTENING MODE

TUNING

MODE SETUP

PRESET

TUNING

TUNING RETURN

ENTER

SETUP MIC

VIDEO

S VIDEO DIGITAL

AUX 2 INPUT

AUDIOLR

CLEAR

PUSH TO OPEN

LMN O P Q R S T U V X Y

ca b

PR-SC885_En.book Page 9 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Getting to Know the AV Controller

—Continued

For detailed information, see the pages in parentheses.

Speaker/channel indicators (84)

Indicate the speaker conﬁguration and channels

used by the current input source.

– : A box is displayed for each speaker that’s set

in the Speaker Conﬁguration. No box appears for

speakers that are set to No or None.

The following abbreviations indicate which audio

channels are included in the current input signal.

–

: Front left

–

: Center

–

: Front right

–

: Surround left

–

LFE

: Subwoofer (Low Frequency Effects)

–

: Surround right

–

SBL

: Surround back left

–

: Surround back

–

SBR

: Surround back right

Listening mode and format indicators (79)

Show the selected listening mode and audio input

signal format.

Tuning indicators (58)

HD (60):

Lights up if the current AM or FM station

supports HD Radio technology.

SPS (61):

Lights up when tuned to a HD Radio

station that’s transmitting secondary multicast chan-

nels.

AUTO (58):

Lights up when Auto Tuning mode is

selected for AM or FM radio. Goes off when Man-

ual Tuning mode is selected.

TUNED (58):

Lights up when tuned to a radio sta-

tion.

FM STEREO (58):

Lights up when tuned to a ste-

reo FM station.

SLEEP indicator (77)

Lights up when the Sleep function has been set.

Audyssey indicator (52)

Lights up during automatic speaker setup.

Headphone indicator (77)

Lights up when a pair of headphones are plugged

into the PHONES jack.

Message area

Displays various information.

Audio input indicators (60, 78)

Indicate the type of audio input that’s selected as the

audio source: HDMI, ANALOG, or DIGITAL.

While a digital HD Radio transmission is being

received, the DIGITAL indicator lights up. While an

analog HD Radio transmission is being received,

the ANALOG indicator lights up.

Volume level (57)

Displays the volume level.

MUTING indicator (76)

Flashes while the AV controller is muted.

Display

12 34

56 7 890

PR-SC885_En.book Page 10 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Getting to Know the AV Controller

—Continued

REMOTE CONTROL

This (Remote Interactive) jack can be con-

nected to the jack on another -capable

Onkyo component for remote and system control.

To use , you must make an analog audio connec-

tion (RCA) between the AV controller and the other

component, even if they are connected digitally.

RS232

This port is for connecting the AV controller to

home automation equipment and external control-

lers.

PHONO IN

This audio input is for connecting a turntable.

COMPONENT VIDEO IN 1, 2, and 3

These RCA component video inputs are for con-

necting components with a component video output,

such as a DVD player, DVD recorder, or DVR (dig-

ital video recorder). They’re assignable, which

means you can assign each one to an input selector

to suit your setup. See “Component Video Input

Setup” on page 48.

COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 1

This RCA component video output is for connect-

ing a TV or projector with a component video input.

COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 2/

ZONE 2 OUT

This RCA component video output is for connect-

ing a TV or projector with a component video input

located in your main listening room or Zone 2.

HDMI IN 1–4, OUT MAIN, and OUT SUB

HDMI (High Deﬁnition Multimedia Interface) con-

nections carry digital audio and digital video.

The HDMI inputs are for connecting components

with an HDMI output, such as a DVD player, DVD

recorder, or DVR (digital video recorder). They’re

assignable, which means you can assign each one to

an input selector to suit your setup. See “HDMI

Input Setup” on page 47.

The HDMI outputs are for connecting a TV or pro-

jector with an HDMI input.

SIRIUS antenna

This jack is for connecting a SIRIUS digital

antenna, sold separately (see page 67).

XM antenna

This jack is for connecting an XM Mini-Tuner and

Home Dock, sold separately (see page 62).

MONITOR OUT

The S-Video or composite video jack should be

connected to a video input on your TV or projector.

ZONE 2 OUT

This composite video output can be connected to a

video input on a TV in Zone 2.

IR IN A/B and OUT

A commercially available IR receiver can be con-

nected to the IR IN A or B jack, allowing you to

control the AV controller while you’re in Zone 2, or

control it when it’s out of sight, for example,

installed in a cabinet.

A commercially available IR emitter can be con-

nected to the IR OUT jack to pass IR (infrared)

remote control signals through to other components.

Rear Panel

PHONO

RS232

DIGITAL

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

REMOTE

CONTROL

IN 1

IN 2

IN IN IN

CD TAPE AUX 1

GAME/TV

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

CBL/SAT

AUX 1 VCR/DVR

VCR/DVR DVD

DVD

GND

IN 2

IN 3

ASSIGNABLE

(DVD)

(CBL/SAT)

(VCR/DVR)

(GAME/TV)

(CD)

COLD

HOT GND

OUT

HDMI

IN 1IN 2IN 3IN 4

ASSIGNABLE

OUT

MAIN OUT

SUB

COMPONENT VIDEO

ASSIGNABLE

IN 3

CB/PB

CR/PR

IN 2 IN

1(DVD) MONITOR

OUT 1

OUT IN IN OUT IN IN FRONT FRONTCENTER

SUBWOOFER SUBWOOFER

CENTERSURR SURR

MULTI CH

PRE OUT

SURR BACK SURR BACK

ETHERNET

ZONE 2 ZONE 3

PRE OUT

12V TRIGGER OUT

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

ZONE 2

OUT

INPUT

BALANCE R FRONT R FRONT LSURR R CENTER SURR L

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

SURR BACK R

Bi-AMP

BALANCE L

MONO

SURR BACK L

Bi-AMP

COLD

HOTGND

MONITOR OUT 2

/ZONE 2 OUT

SIRIUS

AC OUTLET

AC INLET

AC 120V

SWITCHED

120W 1A MAX.

60Hz

ANTENNA

HD RADIO

R S

8 9

64 5 J M21 P

3 7 KL

fTU V W YZ c d eabX

PR-SC885_En.book Page 11 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Getting to Know the AV Controller

—Continued

12V TRIGGER OUT (A/B/C)

These outputs can be connected to the 12-volt trig-

ger inputs on other components.

ETHERNET

This port is for connecting the AV controller to

home automation equipment and external control-

lers. Use only shielded Ethernet cables.

AM and FM ANTENNA (HD Radio)

The AM push terminals are for connecting an AM

antenna. The FM jack is for connecting an FM

antenna.

AC INLET

The supplied power cord is connected here. The

other end of the power cord should be connected to

a suitable wall outlet.

DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 1, 2, and 3

These coaxial digital audio inputs are for connect-

ing components with a coaxial digital audio output,

such as a CD player or DVD player. They’re assign-

able, which means you can assign each one to an

input selector to suit your setup. See “Digital Input

Setup” on page 49.

DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1, 2, and OUT

These optical digital audio inputs are for connecting

components with an optical digital audio output,

such as a CD player or DVD player. They’re assign-

able, which means you can assign each one to an

input selector to suit your setup. See “Digital Input

Setup” on page 49.

The optical digital audio output is for connecting a

digital recorder with an optical digital input, such as

a CD recorder.

GND screw

This screw is for connecting a turntable’s ground

wire.

BALANCE L/R INPUT

This balanced XLR input is for connecting a com-

ponent with a stereo balanced XLR output. For a

mono source, connect to the BALANCE L XLR.

CD IN

This analog audio input is for connecting a CD

player’s analog audio output.

TAPE IN/OUT

These analog audio input and output jacks are for

connecting a recorder with an analog audio input and

output, such as a cassette deck, MD recorder, etc.

AUX 1 IN

A VCR for playback only or other video source can

be connected here. There’s S-Video and composite

video input jacks for connecting the video signal.

GAME/TV IN

A game console or TV output can be connected

here. There’s S-Video and composite video input

jacks for connecting the video signal.

CBL/SAT IN

A cable or satellite receiver can be connected here.

There’s S-Video and composite video input jacks

for connecting the video signal.

VCR/DVR IN/OUT

A video component, such as a VCR or DVR, can be

connected here for recording and playback. There’s

S-Video and composite video input and output jacks

for connecting the video signal.

DVD IN

This input is for connecting a DVD player. There’s

S-Video and composite video input jacks for con-

necting the video signal.

FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURR L/R, SURR

BACK L/R, and SUBWOOFER PREOUT

These balanced XLR outputs are for connecting a

multichannel power ampliﬁer and powered sub-

woofer.

The FRONT L/R and SURR BACK L/R outputs can

be used with front speakers and surround back

speakers, respectively, or used to bi-amp the front

speakers. See “Bi-amping the Front Speakers” on

page 23.

MULTI CH input: FRONT L/R, CENTER,

SUBWOOFER, SURR L/R, and SURR BACK

L/R

This analog multichannel input is for connecting a

component with a 5.1/7.1-channel analog audio out-

put, such as a DVD player, DVD-Audio or

SACD-capable player, or an MPEG decoder.

PRE OUT: FRONT L/R, CENTER,

SUBWOOFER, SURR L/R, and SURR BACK

L/R

This 5.1/7.1 multichannel analog audio output can

be connected to the analog audio input on a multi-

channel power ampliﬁer for when you want to use

the AV controller solely as a preampliﬁer. The SUB-

WOOFER jack is for connecting a powered sub-

woofer.

PRE OUT: ZONE 2, ZONE 3

These analog audio outputs can be connected to the

line inputs on ampliﬁers in Zone 2 and Zone 3. The

SW jacks can be connected to the inputs on pow-

ered subwoofers in Zone 2 and Zone 3.

AC OUTLET

These switched AC outlets can be used to supply

power to other AV components. The type and num-

ber of outlets depends on the country in which you

purchased your AV controller.

See pages 19–42 for hookup information.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 12 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Remote Controller

Notes:

• If the remote controller doesn’t work reliably, try

replacing the batteries.

• Don’t mix new and old batteries or different types of

batteries.

•If you intend not to use the remote controller for a long

time, remove the batteries to prevent damage from

leakage or corrosion.

•Expired batteries should be removed as soon as possi-

ble to prevent damage from leakage or corrosion.

When using the remote controller, point it toward the AV

controller’s remote control sensor, as shown below.

Notes:

•The remote controller may not work reliably if the AV

controller is subjected to bright light, such as direct

sunlight or inverter-type ﬂuorescent lights. Keep this

in mind when installing.

•If another remote controller of the same type is used in

the same room, or the AV controller is installed close

to equipment that uses infrared rays, the remote con-

troller may not work reliably.

• Don’t put anything on top of the remote controller,

such as a book or magazine, because a button may be

pressed continuously, thereby draining the batteries.

•The remote controller may not work reliably if the AV

controller is installed in a rack behind colored glass

doors. Keep this in mind when installing.

•The remote controller will not work if there’s an obsta-

cle between it and the AV controller’s remote control

sensor.

Installing the Batteries

To open the battery compartment, press

the small hollow and slide open the cover.

Insert the three supplied batteries (AA/R6)

in accordance with the polarity diagram

inside the battery compartment.

Slide the cover shut.

Using the Remote Controller

30˚

Approx. 16 ft.

(5 m)

Remote control sensor

STANDBY indicator AV controller

PR-SC885_En.book Page 13 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Remote Controller

—Continued

As well as the AV controller, you can also use the remote

controller to control your other AV components. The

remote controller has a speciﬁc operating mode for use

with each type of component. Modes are selected by

using the REMOTE MODE buttons.

■

RECEIVER/TAPE Mode

In RECEIVER/TAPE mode, you can control the AV

controller and an Onkyo cassette recorder connected via

■

DVD Mode

By default, you can control an Onkyo DVD player in this

mode. By entering the appropriate remote control code,

you can control components made by other manufactur-

ers (see page 116).

■

CD/CDR/MD Mode

By default, you can control an Onkyo CD player in this

mode. By entering the appropriate remote control code,

you can control a CD player, MD recorder, or CD

recorder made by another manufacturer (see page 116).

■

DOCK Mode

This mode is for controlling an Apple iPod in an Onkyo

RI Dock. By default, you can control an RI Dock that has

a remote control sensor, such as the DS-A2. To control

an RI Dock that’s connected via , you must enter the

appropriate remote control code ﬁrst (see page 116).

■

TV and VCR Modes

With these modes, you can control a TV and VCR. You

must enter the appropriate remote control code ﬁrst (see

page 116).

■

CABLE/SAT Mode

In CABLE/SAT mode, you can control a cable or satel-

lite TV receiver. You must enter the appropriate remote

control code ﬁrst (see page 116).

■

ZONE 2/ZONE 3 Modes

These modes are for controlling Zone 2 and Zone 3 (see

page 111).

RECEIVER/TAPE mode is used to control the AV con-

troller. It can also be used to control an Onkyo cassette

recorder connected via .

To set the remote controller to RECEIVER/TAPE

mode, press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE

button.

Note:

• Some of the remote controller functions described in

this manual may not work as expected with other com-

ponents.

About the Remote Controller Modes

Use the REMOTE MODE buttons to select

a mode.

Use the buttons supported by that mode

to control the component.

RECEIVER/TAPE mode: see right col-

umn

DVD mode: see page 16

CD/MD/CDR mode: see page 17

DOCK mode: see page 18

TV, VCR, CABLE/SAT modes: see page 118

RECEIVER/TAPE Mode

INPUT SELECTOR

LISTENING MODE

ON STANDBY

DISPLAY MUTING

RC-

690

DIMMER

CDR/MD

SAT

TAPE/AMP

SLEEP

MACRO

REMOTE MODE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

REPEAT

PLAY MODE

---

10 11 12

VIDEO OFFOPEN/CLOSE

TV CH

TV VOL

PLAYLIST

RANDOM

DVD

AUX1AUX

GAME/TV

CBL/SATVCR/DVR

D. TUN

TUNER

TAPE

PHONO

VCRVCR DVDDVD HDDHDD

REC

ENTER

TEST TONE

AUDIO SEL

CH SEL

SURR

DIRECT

THX

PURE A

STEREO

LEVEL

L NIGHT

ALL ST

VOL

DISC

ALBUM

VCR

CABLE DOCK

DVD

RECEIVER

123

ZONE

INPUT

+10 0

CLEAR

123

456

789

Re-EQ

TAPE/AMP

RECEIVER

PR-SC885_En.book Page 14 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Remote Controller

—Continued

For detailed information, see the pages in parentheses.

STANDBY button (43)

Sets the AV controller to Standby.

ON button (43)

Turns on the AV controller.

INPUT SELECTOR buttons (57)

Used to select the input source.

MACRO buttons (120)

Used with the Macro function.

DIMMER button (76)

Adjusts the display brightness.

Arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] and ENTER buttons

Used to select and adjust settings.

CH +/– button (75)

Selects radio presets.

SETUP button

Used to change settings.

DISPLAY button (77)

Displays information about the current input source.

LISTENING MODE buttons (79)

Used to select the listening modes. The [STEREO],

[SURR], and LISTENING MODE [ ]/[ ] but-

tons can be used at any time, regardless of the cur-

rently selected remote controller mode.

TEST TONE, CH SEL, LEVEL–, and LEVEL+

buttons (76, 98)

Used to adjust the level of each speaker.

Light button

Turns the remote controller’s illuminated buttons on

or off.

D.TUN button (59)

Selects the Direct tuning mode for radio.

REMOTE MODE buttons (14)

Used to select the remote controller modes. When

you press a button, the REMOTE MODE button for

the currently selected mode lights up.

SLEEP button (77)

Used with the Sleep function.

VOL [ ]/[ ] button (57)

Adjusts the volume of the AV controller regardless

of the currently selected remote controller mode.

RETURN button

Returns to the previous display when changing set-

tings.

MUTING button (76)

Mutes or unmutes the AV controller.

Re-EQ button (89)

Turns the Re-EQ function on or off.

L NIGHT button (89)

Turns the Late Night function on or off.

AUDIO SEL button (78)

Selects the audio input: analog, digital, HDMI, or

multichannel.

■

TAPE mode

On twin cassette decks, only Deck B can be controlled.

Previous and Next [ ]/[ ] buttons

The Previous [ ] button selects the previous

track. During playback it selects the beginning of

the current track. The Next [ ] button selects the

next track.

Depending on how they were recorded, the Previous

and Next [ ]/[ ] buttons may not work prop-

erly with some cassette tapes.

Play [ ] button

Starts playback.

Rewind and Fast Forward [ ]/[ ] buttons

The Rewind [ ] button starts rewind. The Fast

Forward [ ] button starts fast forward.

Reverse Play [ ] button

Starts reverse playback.

Stop [ ] button

Stops playback.

REC [ ] button

Starts recording.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 15 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Remote Controller

—Continued

To set the remote controller to DVD mode, press the

[DVD] REMOTE MODE button.

STANDBY button

Sets the DVD player to Standby.

ON button

Turns on the DVD player.

Number buttons

Used to enter title, chapter, and track numbers, and

to enter times for locating speciﬁc points.

TOP MENU button

Selects a DVD’s top menu.

Arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] and ENTER buttons

Used to navigate menus and select items.

DISC +/– button

Selects discs on a DVD changer.

SETUP button

Used to access the DVD player’s settings.

DISPLAY button

Displays information about the current disc, title,

chapter, or track, including elapsed time, remaining

time, total time, and so on.

Playback buttons

From left to right: Previous, Play, Next, Rewind,

Pause, Stop, Fast Forward, Slow Reverse, and Slow

Forward.

REPEAT button

Used with the repeat playback function.

AUDIO button

Selects foreign language soundtracks and audio for-

mats (e.g., Dolby Digital or DTS).

OPEN/CLOSE [ ] button

Opens and closes the disc tray.

CLEAR button

Cancels functions and clears entered numbers.

MENU button

Displays a DVD’s menu.

RETURN button

Exits the DVD player’s onscreen setup menu.

RANDOM button

Used with the random playback function.

PLAY MODE button

Selects play modes on components with selectable

play modes.

SUBTITLE button

Selects subtitles.

VIDEO OFF button

Turns off the internal video circuitry, eliminating

any possibility of interference.

DVD Mode

INPUT SELECTOR

LISTENING MODE

ON STANDBY

DISPLAY MUTING

RC-

690

DIMMER

CDR/MD

SAT

TAPE/AMP

SLEEP

MACRO

REMOTE MODE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

REPEAT

PLAY MODE

---

10 11 12

VIDEO OFFOPEN/CLOSE

TV CH

TV VOL

PLAYLIST

RANDOM

DVD

AUX1AUX

GAME/TV

CBL/SATVCR/DVR

D. TUN

TUNER

TAPE

PHONO

VCRVCR DVDDVD HDDHDD

REC

ENTER

TEST TONE

AUDIO SEL

CH SEL

SURR

DIRECT

THX

PURE A

STEREO

LEVEL

L NIGHT

ALL ST

VOL

DISC

ALBUM

VCR

CABLE DOCK

DVD

RECEIVER

123

ZONE

INPUT

+10 0

CLEAR

123

456

789

Re-EQ

DVD

PR-SC885_En.book Page 16 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Remote Controller

—Continued

To control an Onkyo CD player, MD recorder, or CD

recorder, or a CD or MD player/recorder made by

another manufacturer, press the [CD] REMOTE

MODE button to select the CD/MD/CDR remote con-

troller mode.

In order to control an Onkyo MD recorder or CD

recorder, or a component made by another manufacturer,

you must ﬁrst enter the appropriate remote control code

(see page 116).

STANDBY button

Sets the component to Standby.

ON button

Set the component to On or Standby.

Number buttons

Used to enter track numbers and times for locating

speciﬁc points.

Arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] and ENTER buttons

Used with some components.

DISC +/– button

Selects discs on a CD changer.

DISPLAY button

Displays information about the current disc or track,

including elapsed time, remaining time, total time,

and so on.

Playback buttons

From left to right: Previous, Play, Next, Rewind,

Pause, Stop, and Fast Forward.

REC [ ] button

Starts recording.

REPEAT button

Used with the repeat playback function.

OPEN/CLOSE [ ] button

Opens or closes the disc tray or ejects the MiniDisc.

CLEAR button

Cancels functions and clears entered numbers.

RETURN button

Used with some components.

RANDOM button

Used with the random playback function.

PLAY MODE button

Selects play modes on components with selectable

play modes.

CD/MD/CDR Modes

INPUT SELECTOR

LISTENING MODE

ON STANDBY

DISPLAY MUTING

RC-

690

DIMMER

CDR/MD

SAT

TAPE/AMP

SLEEP

MACRO

REMOTE MODE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

REPEAT

PLAY MODE

---

10 11 12

VIDEO OFFOPEN/CLOSE

TV CH

TV VOL

PLAYLIST

RANDOM

DVD

AUX1AUX

GAME/TV

CBL/SATVCR/DVR

D. TUN

TUNER

TAPE

PHONO

VCRVCR DVDDVD HDDHDD

REC

ENTER

TEST TONE

AUDIO SEL

CH SEL

SURR

DIRECT

THX

PURE A

STEREO

LEVEL

L NIGHT

ALL ST

VOL

DISC

ALBUM

VCR

CABLE DOCK

DVD

RECEIVER

123

ZONE

INPUT

+10 0

CLEAR

123

456

789

Re-EQ

CDR/MD

PR-SC885_En.book Page 17 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Remote Controller

—Continued

DOCK mode is for controlling an Apple iPod in an

Onkyo RI Dock.

When Using an RI Dock:

• Connect the RI Dock to the TAPE IN or GAME/TV

IN L/R jacks.

• Set the RI Dock’s RI MODE switch to HDD or

HDD/DOCK.

• Set the AV controller’s Input Display to DOCK (see

page 49).

•To control a DS-A1 RI Dock, you must enter the

appropriate remote control code ﬁrst (see page 116).

• See to the RI Dock’s instruction manual for more

information.

To set the remote controller to DOCK mode, press the

[DOCK] REMOTE MODE button.

STANDBY button

Turns off the iPod.

ON button*

Turns on the iPod.

TOP MENU button

Works as a Mode button when used with a DS-A2

RI Dock.

Arrow [ ]/[ ] and ENTER buttons*

Used to navigate menus and select items.

ALBUM +/– button*

Selects the next or previous album.

DISPLAY button*

Turns on the backlight for 30 seconds.

Previous [ ] button

Restarts the current song. Press it twice to select the

previous song.

Pause [ ] button

Pauses playback. (With 3rd generation iPods, it

works as a Play/Pause button.)

Rewind [ ] button

Press and hold to rewind.

PLAYLIST [ ]/[ ] buttons*

Used to select the previous or next playlist on the

iPod.

REPEAT button*

Used with the repeat function.

MENU button*

Used to access menus.

Play [ ] button

Starts playback. If the component is off, it will turn

on automatically. (With 3rd generation iPods, this

button works as a Play/Pause button.)

Next [ ] button

Selects the next song.

Stop [ ] button

Stops playback and displays a menu.

Fast Forward [ ] button

Press and hold to fast forward.

RANDOM button*

Used with the shufﬂe function.

PLAY MODE button

Used to select play modes on components with

selectable play modes.

Works as a Resume button when used with a DS-A2

RI Dock.

*Buttons marked with an asterisk (*) are not supported

by 3rd generation iPods.

DOCK Mode

INPUT SELECTOR

LISTENING MODE

ON STANDBY

DISPLAY MUTING

RC-

690

DIMMER

CDR/MD

SAT

TAPE/AMP

SLEEP

MACRO

REMOTE MODE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

REPEAT

PLAY MODE

---

10 11 12

VIDEO OFFOPEN/CLOSE

TV CH

TV VOL

PLAYLIST

RANDOM

DVD

AUX1AUX

GAME/TV

CBL/SATVCR/DVR

D. TUN

TUNER

TAPE

PHONO

VCRVCR DVDDVD HDDHDD

REC

ENTER

TEST TONE

AUDIO SEL

CH SEL

SURR

DIRECT

THX

PURE A

STEREO

LEVEL

L NIGHT

ALL ST

VOL

DISC

ALBUM

VCR

CABLE DOCK

DVD

RECEIVER

123

ZONE

INPUT

+10 0

CLEAR

123

456

789

Re-EQ

DOCK

PR-SC885_En.book Page 18 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Connecting a Power Ampliﬁer and Speakers

Thanks to the AV controller’s superb capabilities, you can enjoy surround sound with a real sense of movement in your

own home—just like being in a movie theater or concert hall. You can enjoy DVDs featuring Dolby Digital or DTS.

With analog or digital TV, you can enjoy Dolby Pro Logic IIx, DTS Neo:6, or Onkyo’s original DSP listening modes.

You can also enjoy THX Surround EX (THX-certiﬁed THX speaker system recommended).

Enjoying Home Theater

Corner

position

1/3 of wall

position

Surround back left and right speakers

These speakers are necessary to enjoy Dolby Digital

EX, DTS-ES Matrix, DTS-ES Discrete, THX Surround

EX, etc. They enhance the realism of surround sound

and improve sound localization behind the listener. Posi-

tion them behind the listener about 2–3 feet

(60–100 cm) above ear level.

Surround left and right speakers

These speakers are used for precise

sound positioning and to add realistic

ambience.

Position them at the sides of the lis-

tener, or slightly behind, about 2–3 feet

(60–100 cm) above ear level. Ideally

they should be equally spaced from the

listener.

Center speaker

This speaker enhances the front left

and right speakers, making sound

movements distinct and providing a

full sound image. For movies it’s used

mainly for dialog.

Position it close to your TV (preferably

on top) facing forward at about ear

level, or at the same height as the

front left and right speakers.

Subwoofer

The subwoofer handles the bass sounds of

the LFE (Low-Frequency Effects) channel.

The volume and quality of the bass output

from your subwoofer will depend on its posi-

tion, the shape of your listening room, and

your listening position. In general, a good bass

sound can be obtained by installing the sub-

woofer in a front corner, or at one-third the way

along the front wall, as shown.

Tip: To ﬁnd the best position for your sub-

woofer, while playing a movie or some music

with good bass, experiment by placing your

subwoofer at various positions within the

room and choose the

one that provides

the most satisfying

results.

Front left and right speakers

These output the main sound. Their role in a home theater is to provide a solid

anchor for the sound image. They should be positioned facing the listener at

about ear level, and equally spaced from the TV. Angle them inward slightly so

as to create a triangle, with the listener at the apex.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 19 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Connecting a Power Ampliﬁer and Speakers

—Continued

The AV controller is designed to be used with a separate

multichannel power ampliﬁer. You connect the AV con-

troller’s PRE OUT jacks to the ampliﬁer’s inputs, and

connect your speakers to the ampliﬁer’s speakers termi-

nals. Speaker settings such as crossover frequency and

distance are set on the AV controller.

Speaker Conﬁguration

For the best surround-sound experience, you should use

seven speakers and a powered subwoofer.

The following table shows which channels you should

use based on the number of speakers you have.

* If you’re using only one surround back speaker, use the SURR

BACK L output.

No matter how many speakers you use, a powered sub-

woofer is recommended for a powerful and solid bass.

To get the best from your surround-sound system, you

must set the speaker settings. You can do this automati-

cally (see page 52) or manually (see page 94).

Using Dipole Speakers

You can use dipole speakers for the surround left and

right and surround back left and right speakers. Dipole

speakers output the same sound in two directions.

Dipole speakers typically have an arrow printed on them to

indicate how they should be positioned. The surround left

and right dipole speakers should be positioned so that their

arrows point toward your TV or screen, while the surround

back left and right dipolar speakers should be positioned

so that their arrows point toward each other, as shown.

Connecting Your Speakers

Number of speakers: 234567

Front left

✓✓✓✓✓✓

Front right

✓✓✓✓✓✓

Center

✓✓✓✓

Surround left

✓✓✓✓

Surround right

✓✓✓✓

Surround back*

✓

Surround back left

✓

Surround back right

✓

7 8

TV/screen TV/screen

1. Subwoofer

2. Front left speaker

3. Center speaker

4. Front right speaker

5. Surround left speaker

6. Surround right speaker

7. Surround back left

speaker

8. Surround back right

speaker

Dipole speakers Normal speakers

PR-SC885_En.book Page 20 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Connecting a Power Ampliﬁer and Speakers

—Continued

Connecting a Powered Subwoofer

Using a suitable cable, connect the AV controller’s SUB-

WOOFER PRE OUT to the input on your powered sub-

woofer. If your subwoofer is unpowered and you’re

using an external ampliﬁer, connect the SUBWOOFER

PRE OUT to the amp’s input.

You can also connect a powered subwoofer to the AV

controller’s balanced SUBWOOFER PRE OUT XLR

jack by using a balanced XLR cable.

You can connect the AV controller to a multichannel power ampliﬁer with RCA input jacks by using a multichannel

RCA audio cable or several stereo RCA audio cables.

See your multichannel power ampliﬁer’s instruction manual for more information on connecting speakers.

RS232

DIGITAL

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

REMOTE

CONTROL

IN 1

IN 2

IN IN IN IN

PHONO CD TAPE AUX 1

GAME/TV

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

CBL/SAT

AUX 1 VCR/DVR

VCR/DVR DVD

DVD

GND

IN 2

IN 3

ASSIGNABLE

(DVD)

(CBL/SAT)

(VCR/DVR)

(GAME/TV)

(CD)

OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

ASSIGNABLE

IN 3

CB/PB

CR/PR

IN 2 IN

1(DVD) MONITOR

OUT 1

OUT IN IN OUT IN IN FRONT FRONTCENTER

SUBWOOFER SUBWOOFER

CENTERSURR SURR

MULTI CH PRE OUT

SURR BACK SURR BACK

MONITOR OUT 2

/ZONE 2 OUT

ZONE 2 ZON

PRE OUT

12V TRIGGER OUT

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

ZONE 2

OUT

HDMI

IN 1IN 2IN 3IN 4

ASSIGNABLE

OUT

MAIN OUT

SUB

ETHERNET

COLD

HOT GND

INPUT

BALANCE R FRONT R FRONT LSURR R CENTER SURR L

SUBWOOFER

SURR BACK R

Bi-AMP

BALANCE L

MONO

SURR BACK L

Bi-AMP

SIRIUS

LINE INPUT

SUBWOOFER

PRE OUT

LINE INPUT

Powered

subwoofer

RS232

DIGITAL

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

REMOTE

CONTROL

IN 1

IN 2

IN IN IN IN

PHONO CD TAPE AUX 1

GAME/TV

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

CBL/SAT

AUX 1 VCR/DVR

VCR/DVR DVD

DVD

GND

IN 2

IN 3

ASSIGNABLE

(DVD)

(CBL/SAT)

(VCR/DVR)

(GAME/TV)

(CD)

OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

ASSIGNABLE

IN 3

CB/PB

CR/PR

IN 2 IN

1(DVD) MONITOR

OUT 1

OUT IN IN OUT IN IN FRONT FRONTCENTER

SUBWOOFER SUBWOOFER

CENTERSURR SURR

MULTI CH PRE OUT

SURR BACK SURR BACK

MONITOR OUT 2

/ZONE 2 OUT

ZONE 2 ZONE 3

PRE OUT

12V TRIGGER OUT

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

ZONE 2

OUT

HDMI

IN 1IN 2IN 3IN 4

ASSIGNABLE

OUT

MAIN OUT

SUB

ETHERNET

COLD

HOT GND

INPUT

BALANCE R FRONT R FRONT LSURR R CENTER SURR L

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

SURR BACK R

Bi-AMP

BALANCE L

MONO

SURR BACK L

Bi-AMP

COLD

HOTGND

SIRIUS

INPUT

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

INPUT

Powered

subwoofer

Balanced

XLR cable

Connecting a Power Ampliﬁer with RCA Inputs

AC OUTLET

AC 120V

SWITCHED

120W 1A MAX.

60Hz

ANTENNA

SPEAKER IMPEDANCE

4 OHMS MIN. PER EACH

SPEAKER TERMINAL

AC INLET SEVEN CHANNEL AMPLIFIER

MODEL NO. RDA-7.1

INPUT

SELECT

FUSE

SURROUND BACK

RIGHT

SURROUND

RIGHT

12V TRIGGER

IN OUT

SURROUND

LEFT

CENTER

FRONT

LEFT

SURROUND BACK

LEFT

FRONT

RIGHT

INPUT

SELECT

INPUT

SELECT

INPUT

SELECT

INPUT

SELECT

INPUT

SELECT

INPUT

SELECT

OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT

DIGITAL

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

REMOTE

CONTROL

IN 1

IN 2

IN IN IN IN

PHONO CD TAPE AUX 1

GAME/TV

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

CBL/SAT

AUX 1 VCR/DVR

VCR/DVR DVD

DVD

GND

IN 2

IN 3

ASSIGNABLE

(DVD)

(CBL/SAT)

(VCR/DVR)

(GAME/TV)

(CD)

OUT

OUT IN IN OUT IN IN FRONT FRONTCENTER

SUBWOOFER SUBWOOFER

CENTERSURR SURR

MULTI CH

PRE OUT

SURR BACK SURR BACK

ZONE 2 ZONE 3

PRE OUT

12V TRIGGER OUT

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

ZONE 2

OUT

COLD

HOT GND

INPUT

BALANCE R FRONT R FRONT LSURR R CENTER SURR L

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

SURR BACK R

Bi-AMP

BALANCE L

MONO

SURR BACK L

Bi-AMP

COLD

HOTGND

Surround

back left

speaker

Surround

back right

speaker

Front left

speaker

Front right

speaker

Center

speaker

Surround

right

speaker

Surround

left

speaker

Multichannel

power ampliﬁer

AV controller

PR-SC885_En.book Page 21 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Connecting a Power Ampliﬁer and Speakers

—Continued

You can connect the AV controller to a multichannel power ampliﬁer with balanced XLR input jacks by using several

XLR audio cables.

The AV controller’s balanced PRE OUT XLR jacks are wired as shown.

See your multichannel power ampliﬁer’s instruction manual for more information on connecting speakers.

Connecting a Power Ampliﬁer with XLR Inputs

COLD

HOTGND

RS232

DIGITAL

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

REMOTE

CONTROL

IN 1

IN 2

IN IN IN IN

PHONO CD TAPE AUX 1

GAME/TV

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

CBL/SAT

AUX 1 VCR/DVR

VCR/DVR DVD

DVD

GND

IN 2

IN 3

ASSIGNABLE

(DVD)

(CBL/SAT)

(VCR/DVR)

(GAME/TV)

(CD)

OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

ASSIGNABLE

IN 3

IN 2 IN

1(DVD)

MONITOR

OUT 1

OUT IN IN OUT IN IN FRONT FRONTCENTER

SUBWOOFER SUBWOOFER

CENTERSURR SURR

MULTI CH

PRE OUT

SURR BACK SURR BACK

MONITOR OUT 2

/ZONE 2 OUT

ZONE 2 ZONE 3

PRE OUT

12V TRIGGER OUT

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

ZONE 2

OUT

HDMI

IN 1IN 2IN 3IN 4

ASSIGNABLE

OUT

MAIN OUT

SUB

ETHERNET

COLD

HOT GND

INPUT

BALANCE R FRONT R FRONT LSURR R CENTER SURR L

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

SURR BACK R

Bi-AMP

BALANCE L

MONO

SURR BACK L

Bi-AMP

COLD

HOTGND

SPEAKER IMPEDANCE

4 OHMS MIN. PER EACH

SPEAKER TERMINAL

AC INLET SEVEN CHANNEL AMPLIFIER

MODEL NO. RDA-7.1

INPUT

SELECT

FUSE

SURROUND BACK

RIGHT

SURROUND

RIGHT

12V TRIGGER

IN OUT

SURROUND

LEFT

CENTER

FRONT

LEFT

SURROUND BACK

LEFT

FRONT

RIGHT

INPUT

SELECT

INPUT

SELECT

INPUT

SELECT

INPUT

SELECT

INPUT

SELECT

INPUT

SELECT

OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT

SIRIUS

AC OUTLET

AC INLET

AC 120V

SWITCHED

120W 1A MAX.

60Hz

ANTENNA

HD RADIO

AV controller

Multichannel

power ampliﬁer

Surround

back left

speaker

Surround

back right

speaker

Front left

speaker

Front right

speaker

Center

speaker

Surround

right

speaker

Surround

left

speaker

PR-SC885_En.book Page 22 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Connecting a Power Ampliﬁer and Speakers

—Continued

The FRONT L/R and SURR BACK L/R outputs can be used with front speakers and surround back speakers, respec-

tively, or bi-amped to provide separate tweeter and woofer feeds for a pair of front speakers that support bi-amping,

providing improved bass and treble performance.

• When bi-amping is used, the AV controller is able to feed up to 5.1 speakers in the main room.

•For bi-amping, the FRONT L/R outputs feed the front speakers’ tweeter terminals. And the SURR BACK L/R

outputs feed the front speakers’ woofer terminals.

•Once you’ve completed the bi-amping connections shown below and turned on the AV controller, you must set

the Speaker Type setting to Bi-Amp to enable bi-amping (see page 44).

Important:

•

When making the bi-amping connections, be sure to remove the jumper bars that link the speakers’

tweeter (high) and woofer (low) terminals.

• Bi-amping can only be used with speakers that support bi-amping. Refer to your speaker manual.

See your multichannel power ampliﬁer’s instruction manual for more information on connecting speakers.

Bi-amping the Front Speakers

AC OUTLET

AC 120V

SWITCHED

120W 1A MAX.

60Hz

ANTENNA

DIGITAL

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

REMOTE

CONTROL

IN 1

IN 2

IN IN IN IN

PHONO CD TAPE AUX 1

GAME/TV

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

CBL/SAT

AUX 1 VCR/DVR

VCR/DVR DVD

DVD

GND

IN 2

IN 3

ASSIGNABLE

(DVD)

(CBL/SAT)

(VCR/DVR)

(GAME/TV)

(CD)

OUT

OUT IN IN OUT IN IN FRONT FRONTCENTER

SUBWOOFER SUBWOOFER

CENTERSURR SURR

MULTI CH

PRE OUT

SURR BACK SURR BACK

ZONE 2 ZONE 3

PRE OUT

12V TRIGGER OUT

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

ZONE 2

OUT

COLD

HOT GND

INPUT

BALANCE R FRONT R FRONT LSURR R CENTER SURR L

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

SURR BACK R

Bi-AMP

BALANCE L

MONO

SURR BACK L

Bi-AMP

COLD

HOTGND

SPEAKER IMPEDANCE

4 OHMS MIN. PER EACH

SPEAKER TERMINAL

AC INLET SEVEN CHANNEL AMPLIFIER

MODEL NO. RDA-7.1

INPUT

SELECT

FUSE

SURROUND BACK

RIGHT

SURROUND

RIGHT

12V TRIGGER

IN OUT

SURROUND

LEFT

CENTER

FRONT

LEFT

SURROUND BACK

LEFT

FRONT

RIGHT

INPUT

SELECT

INPUT

SELECT

INPUT

SELECT

INPUT

SELECT

INPUT

SELECT

INPUT

SELECT

OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT

Front left speakerFront right speaker

Center speakerSurround right

speaker

Surround left

speaker

AV controller

Multichannel

power ampliﬁer

Tweeter (high)

Woofer (low)

PR-SC885_En.book Page 23 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Connecting Antennas

This section explains how to connect the supplied indoor

FM antenna and AM loop antenna, and how to connect

commercially available outdoor FM and AM antennas.

The AV controller won’t pick up any radio signals

without any antenna connected, so you must connect the

antenna to use the tuner.

The supplied indoor FM antenna is for indoor use only.

If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied

indoor FM antenna, try a commercially available out-

door FM antenna instead (see page 25).

The supplied indoor AM loop antenna is for indoor use

only.

If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied

indoor AM loop antenna, try using it with a commer-

cially available outdoor AM antenna (see page 25).

Connecting the Indoor FM Antenna

Attach the FM antenna, as shown.

Once your AV controller is ready for use, you’ll

need to tune into an FM radio station and adjust

the position of the FM antenna to achieve the best

possible reception.

Use thumbtacks or something similar to

ﬁx the FM antenna into position.

Caution:

Be careful that you don’t injure yourself

when using thumbtacks.

ANTENNA

HD RADIO

AM antenna push terminals

FM antenna jack

75 Insert the plug fully

into the jack.

Thumbtacks, etc.

Connecting the AM Loop Antenna

Assemble the AM loop antenna, inserting

the tabs into the base, as shown.

Connect both wires of the AM loop

antenna to the AM push terminals, as

shown.

(The antenna’s wires are not polarity sensitive, so

they can be connected either way around).

Make sure that the wires are attached securely and

that the push terminals are gripping the bare

wires, not the insulation.

Once your AV controller is ready for use, you’ll

need to tune into an AM radio station and adjust

the position of the AM antenna to achieve the best

possible reception.

Keep the antenna as far away as possible from

your AV controller, TV, speaker cables, and power

cords.

Push Insert wire Release

PR-SC885_En.book Page 24 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Connecting Antennas

—Continued

If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied

indoor FM antenna, try a commercially available out-

door FM antenna instead.

Notes:

• Outdoor FM antennas work best outside, but usable

results can sometimes be obtained when installed in an

attic or loft.

•For best results, install the outdoor FM antenna well

away from tall buildings, preferably with a clear line

of sight to your local FM transmitter.

• Outdoor antenna should be located away from possi-

ble noise sources, such as neon signs, busy roads, etc.

•For safety reasons, outdoor antenna should be situated

well away from power lines and other high-voltage

equipment.

• Outdoor antenna must be grounded in accordance

with local regulations to prevent electrical shock haz-

ards.

■

Using a TV/FM Antenna Splitter

It’s best not to use the same antenna for both FM and TV

reception, as this can cause interference problems. If cir-

cumstances demand it, use a TV/FM antenna splitter, as

shown.

If good reception cannot be achieved using the supplied

AM loop antenna, an outdoor AM antenna can be used in

addition to the loop antenna, as shown.

Outdoor AM antennas work best when installed horizon-

tally outside, but good results can sometimes be obtained

indoors by mounting horizontally above a window. Note

that the AM loop antenna should be left connected.

Outdoor antenna must be grounded in accordance with

local regulations to prevent electrical shock hazards.

Connecting an Outdoor FM Antenna

To AV controller To TV (or VCR)

TV/FM antenna splitter

Connecting an Outdoor AM Antenna

Outdoor antenna

AM loop antenna

Insulated antenna cable

PR-SC885_En.book Page 25 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Connecting Your Components

•Before making any AV connections, read the manuals

supplied with your other AV components.

•Don’t connect the power cord until you’ve completed

and double-checked all AV connections.

Optical Digital Jacks

The AV controller’s optical digital jacks have shutter-

type covers that open when an optical plug is inserted

and close when it’s removed. Push plugs in all the way.

Caution:

To prevent shutter damage, hold the optical

plug straight when inserting and removing.

AV Connection Color Coding

RCA-type AV connections are usually color coded: red,

white, and yellow. Use red plugs to connect right-

channel audio inputs and outputs (typically labeled “R”).

Use white plugs to connect left-channel audio inputs and

outputs (typically labeled “L”). And use yellow plugs to

connect composite video inputs and outputs.

• Push plugs in all the way to make

good connections (loose connections

can cause noise or malfunctions).

•To prevent interference, keep audio

and video cables away from power

cords and speaker cables.

AV Cables and Jacks

Note:

The AV controller does not support SCART connections.

About AV Connections

Left (white)

Right (red)

(Yellow)

Analog audio

Composite video

Left (white)

Right (red)

(Yellow)

Right!

Wrong!

Video

Cable Jack Description

HDMI

HDMI connections can carry uncompressed stan-

dard- or high-deﬁnition digital video and audio and

offer the best picture and sound quality.

Component

video cable

Component video separates the luminance (Y) and

color difference signals (P

, P

), providing the best

picture quality. (Some TV manufacturers label their

component video jacks slightly differently.)

S-Video cable

S-Video separates the luminance and color signals and

provides better picture quality than composite video.

Composite

video cable

Composite video is commonly used on TVs, VCRs,

and other video equipment.

Audio

Optical digital

audio cable

This offers the best sound quality and allows you to

enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS. The audio quality is the

same as for coaxial.

Coaxial digital

audio cable

This offers the best sound quality and allows you to

enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS. The audio quality is the

same as for optical.

Balanced XLR

cable

This cable carries analog audio. Balanced XLR

cables are used for better noise immunity and longer

cable runs.

Analog audio

cable (RCA)

This cable carries analog audio. It’s the most common

connection format for analog audio and can be found

on virtually all AV components.

Multichannel

analog audio

cable (RCA)

This cable carries multichannel analog audio and is

typically used to connect DVD players with a 7.1-

channel analog audio output. Several standard analog

audio cables can be used instead of a multichannel

cable.

HDMI

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

INPUT PREOUT

FRONT CENTER

SUBWOOFER

SURR

MULTI CH

SURR BACK

PR-SC885_En.book Page 26 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Connecting Your Components

—Continued

By connecting both the audio and video outputs of your DVD player and other AV components to the AV controller,

you can switch the audio and video signals simultaneously simply by changing the input source on the AV controller.

The AV controller supports several connection formats for compatibility with a wide range of AV equipment. The format

you choose will depend on the formats supported by your other components. Use the following sections as a guide.

For video components, you must make an audio connection and a video connection.

Video Connection Formats

Video equipment can be connected to the AV controller by using any one of the following video connection formats:

composite video, S-Video, component video, or HDMI, the latter offering the best picture quality.

The AV controller can upconvert and downconvert between video formats, depending on the HDMI Monitor setting,

which generally determines whether video signals are upconverted for the component video output or the HDMI output.

For optimal video performance, THX recommends that video signals pass through the system without upconver-

sion (e.g., component video input through to component video output). It’s also recommended that you set the

Immediate Display preference to Off (page 105).

■

HDMI Monitor Setting Set to Main or Sub

With the HDMI Monitor setting set to Main or

Sub (see page 45), video input signals ﬂow

through the AV controller as shown, with com-

posite video, S-Video, and component video

sources all being upconverted for the HDMI

output.

Use this setting if you connect the AV

controller’s HDMI OUT to your TV.

The composite video, S-Video, and component

video outputs pass through their respective

input signals as they are.

Connecting Audio and Video Signals to the AV Controller

On Standby

Power

Seven Channel Amplifier

RDA-7.1

: Signal Flow

Video Video

Audio

Power ampliﬁer and speakers

(see page 20 for hookup details)

DVD player, etc.

TV, projector,

etc.

Audio

Which Connections Should I Use?

MONITOR OUT

DVD player, etc.

AV controller

TV, projector, etc.

Composite S-Video Component

Video Signal Flow Chart

HDMI

Composite S-Video Component HDMI

PR-SC885_En.book Page 27 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Connecting Your Components

—Continued

■

HDMI Monitor Setting Set to No

With the HDMI Monitor setting set to No (see

page 45), video input signals ﬂow through the

AV controller as shown, with composite video

and S-Video sources being upconverted for the

component video output.

Use this setting if

you connect the AV controller’s COMPO-

NENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 1 or COM-

PONENT VIDEO MONITOR

OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT to your TV.

Composite video is upconverted to S-Video

and S-Video is downconverted to composite

video. Note that these conversions only apply

to the MONITOR OUT V and S outputs, not

the VCR/DVR OUT V and S outputs.

The composite video, S-Video, and component

video pass through their respective input sig-

nals as they are.

Audio Connection Formats

Audio equipment can be connected to the AV

controller by using any of the following audio

connection formats: analog, optical, coaxial,

analog multichannel, or HDMI.

When choosing a connection format, bear in

mind that the AV controller does not convert

digital input signals for analog line outputs and

vice versa. For example, audio signals con-

nected to an optical or coaxial digital input are

not output by the analog TAPE OUT.

MONITOR OUT

DVD player, etc.

AV controller

TV, projector, etc.

Composite S-Video Component

Video Signal Flow Chart

HDMI

Composite S-Video Component HDMI

DVD player, etc.

AV controller

MD recorder, etc.

Optical

Coaxial Analog

Analog

Multichannel

Audio Signal Flow Chart

HDMI

1 Depends on the HDMI Audio Out setting (see page 107).

2 Only the front L/R channels are output.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 28 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Connecting Your Components

—Continued

•With connection , you can listen to and record audio from your TV or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.

•To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection or . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use

and , or and .)

If your TV has no audio outputs, connect an audio output from your VCR or cable or satellite

receiver to the AV controller and use its tuner to listen to TV programs through the AV controller

(see pages 32 and 34).

Connecting a TV or Projector

Connection AV controller Signal ﬂow TV Picture quality

COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 1

⇒

Component video input Best

MONITOR OUT S

⇒

S-Video input Better

MONITOR OUT V

⇒

Composite video input Standard

GAME/TV IN L/R

⇐

Analog audio L/R output

DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 2

⇐

Digital coaxial output

DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1

⇐

Digital optical output

Step 1: Video Connection

Choose a video connection that matches your TV ( , , or ), and then make the connection.

A B

Step 2: Audio Connection

Choose an audio connection that matches your TV ( , , or ), and then make the connection.

a b

b c

a b a c

GND

IN 1IN 2IN 3IN 4

ASSIGNABLE

OUT

MAIN OUT

SUB

COLD

HOT GND

INPUT

BALANCE R FRONT R FRONT LSURR R CENTER SURR L

SURR BACK R

Bi-AMP

MONO

BALANCE L

RS232

DIGITAL

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

REMOTE

CONTROL

IN 1

IN 2

IN IN IN IN

PHONO CD TAPE AUX 1

GAME/TV

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

CBL/SAT

AUX 1 VCR/DVR

VCR/DVR DVD

DVD

IN 2

IN 3

ASSIGNABLE

(DVD)

(CBL/SAT)

(VCR/DVR)

(GAME/TV)

(CD)

OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

ASSIGNABLE

IN 3

IN 2 IN

1(DVD)

MONITOR

OUT 1

OUT IN IN OUT IN IN FRONT FRONTCENTER

SUBWOOFER SUBWOOFER

CENTERSURR SURR

MULTI CH

PRE OUT

SURR BACK SURR BACK

MONITOR OUT 2

/ZONE 2 OUT

12V TRIGGER OUT

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

ZONE 2

OUT

SIRIUS

YCOAXIAL

OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO IN

PRS VIDEO

AUDIO

OUT

VIDEO

OPTICAL

OUT

TV, projector,

etc.

Connect one

or the other

Hint!

PR-SC885_En.book Page 29 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Connecting Your Components

—Continued

•With connection , you can listen to and record audio from a DVD or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.

•To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection or . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use

and , or and .)

• If your DVD player has main left and right outputs and multichannel left and right outputs, be sure to use the

main left and right outputs for connection .

Connecting a DVD player

Connection AV controller Signal ﬂow DVD player Picture quality

COMPONENT VIDEO IN 1

⇐

Component video output Best

DVD IN S

⇐

S-Video output Better

DVD IN V

⇐

Composite video output Standard

DVD IN L/R

⇐

Analog audio L/R output

DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 1

⇐

Digital coaxial output

DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1

⇐

Digital optical output

Step 1: Video Connection

Choose a video connection that matches your DVD player ( , , or ), and then make the connection.

If you use connection , you must connect the AV controller to your TV with the same type of connection.

B C

Step 2: Audio Connection

Choose an audio connection that matches your DVD player ( , , or ), and then make the connection.

b c

a b a c

DIGITAL

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

REMOTE

CONTROL

IN 1

IN 2

IN IN IN IN

PHONO CD TAPE AUX 1

GAME/TV

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

CBL/SAT

AUX 1 VCR/DVR

VCR/DVR DVD

DVD

GND

IN 2

IN 3

ASSIGNABLE

(DVD)

(CBL/SAT)

(VCR/DVR)

(GAME/TV)

(CD)

OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

ASSIGNABLE

IN 3

IN 2 IN

1(DVD)

MONITOR

OUT 1

OUT IN IN OUT IN IN FRONT FRONTCENTER

SUBWOOFER SUBWOOFER

CENTERSURR SURR

MULTI CH

PRE OUT

SURR BACK SURR BACK

MONITOR OUT 2

/ZONE 2 OUT

12V TRIGGER OUT

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

ZONE 2

OUT

COLD

HOT GND

INPUT

BALANCE R FRONT R FRONT LSURR R CENTER SURR L

SURR BACK R

Bi-AMP

MONO

SURR BACK L

Bi-AMP

BALANCE L

SIRIUS

YCOAXIAL

OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

PRS VIDEO

OUT

AUDIO

OUT

VIDEO

OUT

OPTICAL

OUT

DVD player

To connect a DVD player or DVD-Audio/SACD-capable player with a

multichannel analog audio output, see page 31.

Connect one

or the other

PR-SC885_En.book Page 30 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Connecting Your Components

—Continued

Hooking Up the Multichannel Input

If your DVD player supports multichannel audio formats such as DVD-Audio and SACD, and it has a multichannel

analog audio output, you can connect it to the AV controller’s multichannel input.

Use a multichannel analog audio cable, or several normal audio cables, to connect the AV controller’s MULTI CH

FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURR L/R, SURR BACK L/R, and SUBWOOFER jacks to the 7.1-channel analog audio

output on your DVD player. If your DVD player has a 5.1-channel analog audio output, don’t connect anything to the

AV controller’s SURR BACK L/R jacks.

Before using the multichannel input, you must assign it to an input selector. See “Analog Input Setup” on page 51. To

select the multichannel input, see “Selecting Audio Inputs” on page 78. To adjust the subwoofer sensitivity for the

multichannel input, see “Subwoofer Input Sensitivity” on page 107.

RS232

DIGITAL

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

REMOTE

CONTROL

IN 1

IN 2

IN IN IN IN

PHONO CD TAPE AUX 1

GAME/TV

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

CBL/SAT

AUX 1 VCR/DVR

VCR/DVR DVD

DVD

IN 2

IN 3

ASSIGNABLE

(DVD)

(CBL/SAT)

(VCR/DVR)

(GAME/TV)

(CD)

OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

ASSIGNABLE

IN 3

CB/PB

CR/PR

IN 2 IN

1(DVD) MONITOR

OUT 1

OUT IN IN OUT IN IN FRONT FRONTCENTER

SUBWOOFER SUBWOOFER

CENTERSURR SURR

MULTI CH

PRE OUT

SURR BACK SURR BACK

AC INLET

ETHERNET

MONITOR OUT 2

/ZONE 2 OUT

ZONE 2 ZONE 3

PRE OUT

12V TRIGGER OUT

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

ZONE 2

OUT

GND

HDMI

IN 1IN 2IN 3IN 4

ASSIGNABLE

OUT

MAIN OUT

SUB

COLD

HOT GND

INPUT

BALANCE R FRONT R FRONT LSURR R CENTER SURR L

SURR BACK R

Bi-AMP

MONO

BALANCE L

SIRIUS

FRONT CENTER

SUBWOOFER

SURR

MULTI CH

SURR BACK

FRONT

LLR

SURROUND

CENTER SUB

WOOFER

SURR

BACK

5.1 ch

7.1 ch

DVD player

PR-SC885_En.book Page 31 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Connecting Your Components

—Continued

With this hookup, you can use the tuner in your VCR or DVR to listen to your favorite TV programs

via the AV controller, which is useful if your TV has no audio outputs.

•With connection , you can listen to the VCR or DVR in Zone 2 or Zone 3.

•To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection or . (To listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use and

, or and .)

Connecting a VCR or DVR for Playback

Connection AV controller Signal ﬂow VCR or DVR Picture quality

COMPONENT VIDEO IN 2

⇐

Component video output Best

VCR/DVR IN S

⇐

S-Video output Better

VCR/DVR IN V

⇐

Composite video output Standard

VCR/DVR IN L/R

⇐

Analog audio L/R output

DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 2

⇐

Digital coaxial output

DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1

⇐

Digital optical output

Hint!

Step 1: Video Connection

Choose a video connection that matches your VCR or DVR ( , , or ), and then make the connection. If you use

connection , you must connect the AV controller to your TV with the same type of connection.

B C

Step 2: Audio Connection

Choose an audio connection that matches your VCR or DVR ( , , or ), and then make the connection.

a b

b a c

GND

HDMI

IN 1IN 2IN 3IN 4

ASSIGNABLE

OUT

MAIN OUT

SUB

COLD

HOT GND

INPUT

BALANCE R FRONT R FRONT LSURR R CENTER SURR L

SURR BACK R

Bi-AMP

MONO

BALANCE L

RS232

DIGITAL

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

REMOTE

CONTROL

IN 1

IN 2

IN IN IN IN

PHONO CD TAPE AUX 1

GAME/TV

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

CBL/SAT

AUX 1 VCR/DVR

VCR/DVR DVD

DVD

IN 2

IN 3

ASSIGNABLE

(DVD)

(CBL/SAT)

(VCR/DVR)

(GAME/TV)

(CD)

OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

ASSIGNABLE

IN 3

IN 2 IN

1(DVD)

MONITOR

OUT 1

OUT IN IN OUT IN IN FRONT FRONTCENTER

SUBWOOFER SUBWOOFER

CENTERSURR SURR

MULTI CH

PRE OUT

SURR BACK SURR BACK

MONITOR OUT 2

/ZONE 2 OUT

12V TRIGGER OUT

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

ZONE 2

OUT

SIRIUS

YCOAXIAL

OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

PRS VIDEO

OUT

AUDIO

OUT

VIDEO

OUT

OPTICAL

OUT

VCR or DVR

Connect one

or the other

PR-SC885_En.book Page 32 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Connecting Your Components

—Continued

Notes:

• The AV controller must be turned on for recording. Recording is not possible while it’s on Standby.

•If you want to record directly from your TV or another video source without going through the AV controller, connect

the audio and video outputs from your TV or other video component directly to the recording VCR/DVR’s audio and

video inputs. See the manuals supplied with your TV or VCR/DVR for details.

•Video signals connected to composite video inputs can only be recorded via the VCR/DVR OUT V jack. So if your

source TV or VCR is connected to a composite video input, the recording VCR/DVR must be connected to the

VCR/DVR OUT V jack. Likewise, video signals connected to S-Video inputs can only be recorded via the VCR/DVR

OUT S jack. So if your source TV or VCR is connected to an S-Video input, the recording VCR/DVR must be

connected to the VCR/DVR OUT S jack.

Connecting a VCR or DVR for Recording

Connection AV controller Signal ﬂow VCR or DVD recorder Picture quality

VCR/DVR OUT S

⇒

S-Video input Better

VCR/DVR OUT V

⇒

Composite video input Standard

VCR/DVR OUT L/R

⇒

Audio L/R input

DIGITAL OPTICAL OUT

⇒

Digital optical input

Step 1: Video Connection

Choose a video connection that matches your VCR or DVR ( or ), and then make the connection. The video

source to be recorded must be connected to the AV controller via the same type of connection.

Step 2: Audio Connection

Choose an audio connection that matches your VCR or DVR ( or ), and then make the connection.

GND

HDMI

IN 1IN 2IN 3IN 4

ASSIGNABLE

OUT

MAIN OUT

SUB

COLD

HOT GND

INPUT

BALANCE R FRONT R FRONT LSURR R CENTER SURR L

SURR BACK R

Bi-AMP

MONO

BALANCE L

RS232

DIGITAL

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

REMOTE

CONTROL

IN 1

IN 2

IN IN IN IN

PHONO CD TAPE AUX 1

GAME/TV

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

CBL/SAT

AUX 1 VCR/DVR

VCR/DVR DVD

DVD

IN 2

IN 3

ASSIGNABLE

(DVD)

(CBL/SAT)

(VCR/DVR)

(GAME/TV)

(CD)

OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

ASSIGNABLE

IN 3

IN 2 IN

1(DVD)

MONITOR

OUT 1

OUT IN IN OUT IN IN FRONT FRONTCENTER

SUBWOOFER SUBWOOFER

CENTERSURR SURR

MULTI CH

PRE OUT

SURR BACK SURR BACK

MONITOR OUT 2

/ZONE 2 OUT

12V TRIGGER OUT

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

ZONE 2

OUT

SIRIUS

S VIDEO

AUDIO

VIDEO

OPTICAL

VCR or DVR

PR-SC885_En.book Page 33 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Connecting Your Components

—Continued

With this hookup, you can use your satellite or cable receiver to listen to your favorite TV programs

via the AV controller, which is useful if your TV has no audio outputs.

•With connection , you can listen to and record audio from the video source or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.

•To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection or . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use

and , or and .)

Connecting a Satellite, Cable, or Terrestrial Set-top box or Other Video Source

Connection AV controller Signal ﬂow Video source Picture quality

COMPONENT VIDEO IN 3

⇐

Component video output Best

CBL/SAT IN S

⇐

S-Video output Better

CBL/SAT IN V

⇐

Composite video output Standard

CBL/SAT IN L/R

⇐

Analog audio L/R output

DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 3

⇐

Digital coaxial output

DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 2

⇐

Digital optical output

Hint!

Step 1: Video Connection

Choose a video connection that matches the video source ( , , or ), and then make the connection.

If you use connection , you must connect the AV controller to your TV with the same type of connection.

A B C

Step 2: Audio Connection

Choose an audio connection that matches the video source ( , , or ), and then make the connection.

b c

a b a c

GND

HDMI

IN 1IN 2IN 3IN 4

ASSIGNABLE

OUT

MAIN OUT

SUB

COLD

HOT GND

INPUT

BALANCE R FRONT R FRONT LSURR R CENTER SURR L

SURR BACK R

Bi-AMP

MONO

SURR BACK L

Bi-AMP

BALANCE L

RS232

DIGITAL

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

REMOTE

CONTROL

IN 1

IN 2

IN IN IN IN

PHONO CD TAPE AUX 1

GAME/TV

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

CBL/SAT

AUX 1 VCR/DVR

VCR/DVR DVD

DVD

IN 2

IN 3

ASSIGNABLE

(DVD)

(CBL/SAT)

(VCR/DVR)

(GAME/TV)

(CD)

OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

ASSIGNABLE

IN 3

IN 2 IN

1(DVD)

MONITOR

OUT 1

OUT IN IN OUT IN IN FRONT FRONTCENTER

SUBWOOFER SUBWOOFER

CENTERSURR SURR

MULTI CH

PRE OUT

SURR BACK SURR BACK

MONITOR OUT 2

/ZONE 2 OUT

12V TRIGGER OUT

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

ZONE 2

OUT

SIRIUS

YCOAXIAL

OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

PRS VIDEO

OUT

AUDIO

OUT

VIDEO

OUT

OPTICAL

OUT

Satellite, cable, set-top box, etc.

Connect one

or the other

PR-SC885_En.book Page 34 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Connecting Your Components

—Continued

About HDMI

Designed to meet the increased demands of digital TV, HDMI (High Deﬁnition Multimedia Interface) is a new digital

interface standard for connecting TVs, projectors, DVD players, set-top boxes, and other video components. Until now,

several separate video and audio cables have been required to connect AV components. With HDMI, a single cable can

carry control signals, digital video, and up to eight channels of digital audio (2-channel PCM, multichannel digital

audio, or multichannel PCM).

The HDMI video stream (i.e., video signal) is compatible with DVI (Digital Visual Interface),

so TVs and displays

with a DVI input can be connected by using an HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable. (This may not work with some TVs and

displays, resulting in no picture.)

The AV controller uses HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection), so only HDCP-compatible components

will display a picture.

Supported Audio Formats

• 2-channel linear PCM (32–192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit)

• Multichannel linear PCM (7.1 ch, 32–192 kHz)

•Bitstream (DSD, Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS, DTS-HD High Resolution, DTS-HD Mas-

ter Audio)

Your DVD player must be able to output these formats from its HDMI OUT.

About Copyright Protection

The AV controller supports HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection),

a copy-protection system for digital

video signals. Other devices connected to the AV controller via HDMI must also support HDCP.

Use a commercially available HDMI cable (supplied with some components) to connect the AV controller’s HDMI OUT

MAIN or HDMI OUT SUB to the HDMI input on your TV or projector.

*1 DVI (Digital Visual Interface): The digital display interface standard set by the DDWG

in 1999.

*2 HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection): The video encryption technology developed by Intel for HDMI/DVI. It’s designed to

protect video content and requires a HDCP-compatible device to display the encrypted video.

*3 DDWG (Digital Display Working Group): Lead by Intel, Compaq, Fujitsu, Hewlett Packard, IBM, NEC, and Silicon Image, this open

industry group’s objective is to address the industry's requirements for a digital connectivity speciﬁcation for high-performance PCs and

digital displays.

Connecting Components with HDMI

The AV controller’s HDMI interface is based on the following standard:

High-Deﬁnition Multimedia Interface Speciﬁcation Informational Version 1.3a

PR-SC885_En.book Page 35 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Connecting Your Components

—Continued

Making HDMI Connections

■

Video Signals

Digital video signals received by the HDMI IN jacks are normally output by the HDMI OUT MAIN or HDMI OUT

SUB for display on your TV. Composite video, S-Video, and component video sources can be upconverted for the

HDMI outputs. See “Video Connection Formats” on page 27 for more information.

■

Audio Signals

Digital audio signals received by the HDMI IN jacks are output by the speakers and headphones connected to the AV

controller. Normally, they are not output by the HDMI outputs, unless the HDMI Audio Out setting is set to On (see

page 107).

To listen to audio received by the HDMI IN jacks through your TV’s speakers, set the HDMI Audio

Out setting to On (see page 107), and set your DVD player’s HDMI audio output setting to PCM.

When listening to audio from an HDMI component through the AV controller’s speakers, set the HDMI

component so that its video can be seen on your TV (e.g., on your TV, select the input to which the

HDMI component is connected). If your TV is not turned on or a different input is selected, the AV

controller’s speakers may produce no sound or the sound may be cut off.

Note:

• When the HDMI Audio Out setting is set to On (see page 107), or TV Control is set to Enable and you’re listening

through your TV’s speakers, if you turn up the AV controller’s volume control, the sound will be output by the AV

controller’s speakers. To stop the AV controller’s speakers producing sound, change the settings, change your TV’s

settings, or turn down the AV controller’s volume.

Step 1: Use HDMI cables to connect the AV controller’s HDMI jacks to your HDMI-compatible DVD player, TV,

projector, and so on.

Step 2: Assign each HDMI IN to an input selector. See “HDMI Input Setup” on page 47.

Hint!

RS232

DIGITAL

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

REMOTE

CONTROL

IN 1

IN 2

IN IN IN IN

PHONO CD TAPE AUX 1

GAME/TV

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

CBL/SAT

AUX 1 VCR/DVR

VCR/DVR DVD

DVD

IN 2

IN 3

ASSIGNABLE

(DVD)

(CBL/SAT)

(VCR/DVR)

(GAME/TV)

(CD)

OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

ASSIGNABLE

IN 3

IN 2 IN

1(DVD)

MONITOR

OUT 1

OUT IN IN OUT IN IN FRONT FRONTCENTER

SUBWOOFER SUBWOOFER

CENTERSURR SURR

MULTI CH PRE OUT

SURR BACK SURR BACK

ETHERNET

MONITOR OUT 2

/ZONE 2 OUT

ZONE 2 ZONE 3

PRE OUT

12V TRIGGER OUT

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

ZONE 2

OUT

GND

HDMI

IN 1IN 2IN 3IN 4

ASSIGNABLE

OUT

MAIN OUT

SUB

COLD

HOT GND

INPUT

BALANCE R FRONT R FRONT LSURR R CENTER SURR L

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

SURR BACK R

Bi-AMP

BALANCE L

MONO

SURR BACK L

Bi-AMP

COLD

HOTGND

SIRIUS

HDMI

IN 1 OUT

MAIN

HDMI

OUT

DVD player

PR-SC885_En.book Page 36 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Connecting Your Components

—Continued

•With connection , you can listen to and record audio from your game console or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.

•To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use

and .)

Connecting a Game Console

Connection AV controller Signal ﬂow Game console Picture quality

COMPONENT VIDEO IN 3

⇐

Component video output Best

GAME/TV IN S

⇐

S-Video output Better

GAME/TV IN V

⇐

Composite video output Standard

GAME/TV IN L/R

⇐

Analog audio L/R output

DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1

⇐

Digital coaxial output

Step 1: Video Connection

Choose a video connection that matches your game console ( , , or ), and then make the connection.

If you use connection , you must connect the AV controller to your TV with the same type of connection.

B C

Step 2: Audio Connection

Choose an audio connection that matches your DVD player ( , , or ), and then make the connection.

b c

b a

GND

HDMI

IN 1IN 2IN 3IN 4

ASSIGNABLE

OUT

MAIN OUT

SUB

COLD

HOT GND

INPUT

BALANCE R FRONT R FRONT LSURR R CENTER SURR L

SURR BACK R

Bi-AMP

MONO

BALANCE L

RS232

DIGITAL

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

REMOTE

CONTROL

IN 1

IN 2

IN IN IN IN

PHONO CD TAPE AUX 1

GAME/TV

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

CBL/SAT

AUX 1 VCR/DVR

VCR/DVR DVD

DVD

IN 2

IN 3

ASSIGNABLE

(DVD)

(CBL/SAT)

(VCR/DVR)

(GAME/TV)

(CD)

OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

ASSIGNABLE

IN 3

IN 2 IN

1(DVD)

MONITOR

OUT 1

OUT IN IN OUT IN IN FRONT FRONTCENTER

SUBWOOFER SUBWOOFER

CENTERSURR SURR

MULTI CH

PRE OUT

SURR BACK SURR BACK

MONITOR OUT 2

/ZONE 2 OUT

12V TRIGGER OUT

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

ZONE 2

OUT

SIRIUS

YPB

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

PRS VIDEO

OUT

AUDIO

OUT

VIDEO

OUT

OPTICAL

OUT

Game Console

PR-SC885_En.book Page 37 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Connecting Your Components

—Continued

Connecting a Camcorder or Other AV Component

Connection AV controller Signal ﬂow Camcorder

AUX 2 Input S Video

⇐

S-Video output

AUX 2 Input Video

⇐

Composite video output

AUX 2 Input L/R

⇐

Analog audio L/R output

AUX 2 Input Digital

⇐

Digital optical output

Step 1: Video Connection

Choose a video connection that matches your camcorder ( or ), and then make the connection.

A B

Step 2: Audio Connection

Choose an audio connection that matches your camcorder ( or ), and then make the connection.

TONE HDMI OUT

DIGITAL INPUT

LEVEL STEREO THX

DIMMER MEMORY

LISTENING MODE

TUNING

MODE SETUP

PRESET

TUNING

TUNING RETURN

ENTER

SETUP MIC

VIDEO

S VIDEO DIGITAL

AUX 2 INPUT

AUDIOLR

CLEAR

MASTER VOLUME

CDTUNER

TAPECBL/SAT GAME/TV AUX 1 AUX 2VCR/DVR

DVD PHONO DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN DIGITAL

S VIDEO

INPUT

OPTICAL

OUT

AUDIO

INPUT

VIDEO

INPUT

S VIDEO

OUT

AUDIO

OUT

VIDEO

OUT

Camcorder, etc.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 38 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Connecting Your Components

—Continued

•With connection , you can listen to and record audio from the CD player or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.

•To connect the CD player digitally, use connection or . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well,

use and , or and .)

The AV controller’s PHONO IN is designed for use with

a moving magnet (MM) type cartridge.

Use an analog audio cable to connect the AV controller’s

PHONO IN L/R jacks to the audio output on your turn-

table.

Notes:

• If your turntable has a ground wire, connect it to the

AV controller’s GND screw. With some turntables,

connecting the ground wire may produce an audible

hum. If this happens, disconnect it.

• If your turntable has a moving coil (MC) type car-

tridge, you’ll need a commercially available MC head

amp or MC transformer. Connect your turntable to the

head amp or transformer, and connect that to the AV

controller’s PHONO IN L/R jacks.

•You can also use a phono equalizer to connect a turn-

table with an MC-type cartridge. See your phono

equalizer’s manual for details.

Connecting a CD Player

Connection AV controller Signal ﬂow CD

CD IN L/R

⇐

Analog audio L/R output

DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 2

⇐

Digital coaxial output

DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 2

⇐

Digital optical output

Connecting a Turntable

RS232

DIGITAL

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

REMOTE

CONTROL

IN 1

IN 2

IN IN IN IN

PHONO CD TAPE AUX 1

GAME/TV

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

CBL/SAT

AUX 1 VCR/DVR

VCR/DVR DVD

DVD

IN 2

IN 3

ASSIGNABLE

(DVD)

(CBL/SAT)

(VCR/DVR)

(GAME/TV)

(CD)

OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

ASSIGNABLE

IN 3

IN 2 IN

1(DVD)

MONITOR

OUT 1

OUT IN IN OUT IN IN FRONT FRONTCENTER

SUBWOOFER SUBWOOFER

CENTERSURR SURR

MULTI CH

PRE OUT

SURR BACK SURR BACK

AC INLET

ETHERNET

MONITOR OUT 2

/ZONE 2 OUT

ZONE 2 ZONE 3

PRE OUT

12V TRIGGER OUT

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

ZONE 2

OUT

GND

HDMI

IN 1IN 2IN 3IN 4

ASSIGNABLE

OUT

MAIN OUT

SUB

COLD

HOT GND

INPUT

BALANCE R FRONT R FRONT LSURR R CENTER SURR L

SURR BACK R

Bi-AMP

MONO

BALANCE L

SIRIUS

COAXIAL

IN 2

COAXIAL

OUT

AUDIO

OUT

OPTICAL

OUT

OPTICAL

IN 2

Step 1:

Choose a connection that matches your CD player ( , , or ), and then make the connection.

a b

CD player

Connect one or the other

a b a c

RS232

DIGITAL

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

REMOTE

CONTROL

IN 1

IN 2

IN IN IN IN

PHONO CD TAPE AUX 1

GAME/TV

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

CBL/SAT

AUX 1 VCR/DVR

VCR/DVR DVD

DVD

IN 2

IN 3

ASSIGNABLE

(DVD)

(CBL/SAT)

(VCR/DVR)

(GAME/TV)

(CD)

OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

ASSIGNABLE

IN 3

IN 2 IN

1(DVD)

MONITOR

OUT 1

OUT IN IN OUT IN IN FRONT FRONTCENTER

SUBWOOFER SUBWOOFER

CENTERSURR SURR

MULTI CH

PRE OUT

SURR BACK SURR BACK

ETHERNET

MONITOR OUT 2

/ZONE 2 OUT

ZONE 2 ZONE 3

PRE OUT

12V TRIGGER OUT

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

ZONE 2

OUT

GND

HDMI

IN 1IN 2IN 3IN 4

ASSIGNABLE

OUT

MAIN OUT

SUB

COLD

HOT GND

INPUT

BALANCE R FRONT R FRONT LSURR R CENTER SURR L

SURR BACK R

Bi-AMP

MONO

BALANCE L

SIRIUS

AUDIO

OUTPUT

PHONO

PR-SC885_En.book Page 39 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Connecting Your Components

—Continued

•With connection , you can play and record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.

•To connect the recorder digitally for playback, use connections and , or and .

•To connect the recorder digitally for recording, use connection .

You can connect a balanced audio source to the AV controller’s BALANCE L/R XLR jacks by using two XLR audio

cables. To use the balanced input, you must assign it to an input selector (see page 51). If you connect a mono source,

use the BALANCE L XLR jack and set the Balance Input setting to Mono (see page 51). The AV controller’s balanced

INPUT XLR jacks are wired as shown.

Connecting a Cassette, CDR, MiniDisc, or DAT Recorder

Connection AV controller Signal ﬂow Cassette, CDR, MD, or DAT recorder

TAPE IN L/R

TAPE OUT L/R

⇐

⇒

Analog audio L/R output

Analog audio L/R input

DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 2

⇐

Digital coaxial output

DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 2

⇐

Digital optical output

DIGITAL OPTICAL OUT

⇒

Digital optical input

Connecting a Balanced Audio Source

RS232

DIGITAL

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

REMOTE

CONTROL

IN 1

IN 2

IN IN IN IN

PHONO CD TAPE AUX 1

GAME/TV

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

CBL/SAT

AUX 1 VCR/DVR

VCR/DVR DVD

DVD

IN 2

IN 3

ASSIGNABLE

(DVD)

(CBL/SAT)

(VCR/DVR)

(GAME/TV)

(CD)

OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

ASSIGNABLE

IN 3

IN 2 IN

1(DVD)

MONITOR

OUT 1

OUT IN IN OUT IN IN FRONT FRONTCENTER

SUBWOOFER SUBWOOFER

CENTERSURR SURR

MULTI CH

PRE OUT

SURR BACK SURR BACK

AC INLET

ETHERNET

MONITOR OUT 2

/ZONE 2 OUT

ZONE 2 ZONE 3

PRE OUT

12V TRIGGER OUT

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

ZONE 2

OUT

GND

HDMI

IN 1IN 2IN 3IN 4

ASSIGNABLE

OUT

MAIN OUT

SUB

COLD

HOT GND

INPUT

BALANCE R FRONT R FRONT LSURR R CENTER SURR L

SURR BACK R

Bi-AMP

MONO

BALANCE L

SIRIUS

COAXIAL

IN 2

COAXIAL

OUT

AUDIO

OPTICAL

OUT

OPTICAL

IN 2

OPTICAL

TAPE

AUDIO

OUT

TAPE

OPTICAL

Step 1:

Choose a connection that matches your recorder ( , , , or ), and then make the connection.

a b c d

Cassette, CDR, MD, etc.

Connect one

or the other

a b a c

SIRIUS

RS232

DIGITAL

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

REMOTE

CONTROL

IN 1

IN 2

IN IN IN IN

PHONO CD TAPE AUX 1

GAME/TV

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

CBL/SAT

AUX 1 VCR/DVR

VCR/DVR DVD

DVD

GND

IN 2

IN 3

ASSIGNABLE

(DVD)

(CBL/SAT)

(VCR/DVR)

(GAME/TV)

(CD)

OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

ASSIGNABLE

IN 3

IN 2 IN

1(DVD)

MONITOR

OUT 1

OUT IN IN OUT IN IN FRONT FRONTCENTER

SUBWOOFER SU

SURR

MULTI CH

SURR BACK

MONITOR OUT 2

/ZONE 2 OUT

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

ZONE 2

OUT

HDMI

IN 1IN 2IN 3IN 4

ASSIGNABLE

OUT

MAIN OUT

SUB

COLD

HOT GND

INPUT

BALANCE R FRONT R FRONT LSURR R CENTER SURR L

SURR BACK R

Bi-AMP

BALANCE L

MONO

COLD

HOT GND

INPUT

BALANCE R BALANCE L

MONO

COLD

HOT GND

Stereo audio source with

balanced XLR output

PR-SC885_En.book Page 40 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Connecting Your Components

—Continued

■

If Your iPod Supports Video:

Connect your RI Dock’s audio output jacks to the

AV controller’s GAME/TV IN L/R jacks, and con-

nect its video output jack to the AV controller’s

GAME/TV IN V jack.

(Onkyo DS-A2 hookup shown below.)

■

If you have an Onkyo DS-A1 RI Dock

• Connect its video output jack to the AV controller’s

GAME/TV IN S jack.

• Enter the appropriate remote control code before

using the AV controller’s remote controller for the ﬁrst

time (see page 116).

■

If Your iPod Doesn’t Support Video:

Connect your RI Dock’s audio output jacks to the

AV controller’s GAME/TV IN L/R jacks.

(Onkyo DS-A2 hookup shown below.)

The AV controller has AC outlets on its rear panel that can be used to

connect the power cords of other components that you intend to use with

the AV controller. These components can then be left turned on so that

they turn on and off as and when the AV controller is set to On or

Standby.

Caution:

•Make sure that the total capacity of the components that you connect

to the AC OUTLETS does not exceed the stated capacity (e.g., TOTAL

120 W).

Note:

• When the HDMI Control setting is set to Enable (page 107), the AC

outlets are on all the time regardless of whether the AV controller is

set to On or Standby, or Ready mode in this case, so any components

connected to them cannot be turned on or off automatically.

•Onkyo components connected via should be connected directly to a wall outlet, not an AC OUTLET on the AV

controller.

Connecting an RI Dock

RS232

DIGITAL

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

REMOTE

CONTROL

IN 1

IN 2

IN IN IN IN

PHONO CD TAPE AUX 1

GAME/TV

GAME/TV CBL/S

CBL/S

AUX 1

IN 2

IN 3

ASSIGNABLE

(DVD)

(CBL/SAT)

(VCR/DVR)

(GAME/TV)

(CD)

OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

ASSIGNABLE

IN 3

IN 2 IN

1(DVD)

MONITOR

OUT 1

OUT IN IN

MONITOR OUT 2

/ZONE 2 OUT

GND

HDMI

IN 2IN 3IN 4

ASSIGNABLE

COLD

HOT GND

INPUT

BALANCE R SURR

SURR BACK R

Bi-AMP

MONO

BALANCE L

SIRIUS

GAME/TV

RS232

DIGITAL

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

REMOTE

CONTROL

IN 1

IN 2

IN IN IN IN

PHONO CD TAPE AUX 1

GAME/TV

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

CBL/SAT

AUX 1

IN 2

IN 3

ASSIGNABLE

(DVD)

(CBL/SAT)

(VCR/DVR)

(GAME/TV)

(CD)

OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

ASSIGNABLE

IN 3

IN 2 IN

1(DVD)

MONITOR

OUT 1

OUT IN IN O

MONITOR OUT 2

/ZONE 2 OUT

GND

HDMI

IN 1IN 2IN 3IN 4

ASSIGNABLE

COLD

HOT GND

INPUT

BALANCE R SURR R

SURR BACK R

Bi-AMP

MONO

BALANCE L

SIRIUS

GAME/TV

Connecting the Power Cords of Other Components

Notes:

• Connect the RI Dock to the AV controller with an cable (see page 42).

• Set the RI Dock’s RI MODE switch to HDD or HDD/DOCK.

• Set the AV controller’s Input Display to DOCK (see page 49).

• See the RI Dock’s instruction manual for more information.

AC OUTLET

AC INLET

AC 120V

SWITCHED

120W 1A MAX.

60Hz

AC OUTLET

AC 120V

SWITCHED

120W 1A MAX.

60Hz

PR-SC885_En.book Page 41 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Connecting Your Components

—Continued

With (Remote Interactive), you can use the following special functions:

Auto Power On/Standby

When you start playback on a component connected via , if the AV controller is on Standby, it will automatically

turn on and select that component as the input source. Similarly, when the AV controller is set to Standby, all compo-

nents connected via will also go on Standby. This function will not work with components that are connected to an

AC OUTLET on the AV controller.

Direct Change

When playback is started on a component connected via , the AV controller automatically selects that component as

the input source. If your DVD player is connected to the AV controller’s multichannel input, you’ll need to press the

[AUDIO SEL] button repeatedly and select Multich to hear all channels (see page 78), as the Direct Change func-

tion selects the DVD IN L/R jacks.

Remote Control

You can use the AV controller’s remote controller to control your other -capable Onkyo components. You must enter

the appropriate remote control code ﬁrst (see page 117). And remember to point the remote controller at the AV control-

ler and not the other component.

Notes:

•Use only cables for connections. cables

are supplied with Onkyo players (DVD, CD, etc.).

• Some components have two jacks. You can con-

nect either one to the AV controller. The other jack is

for connecting additional -capable components.

• Connect only Onkyo components to jacks. Con-

necting other manufacturer’s components may cause

a malfunction.

•Some components may not support all functions.

Refer to the manuals supplied with your other Onkyo

components.

• While Zone 2 or Zone 3 is on, the Auto Power

On/Standby and Direct Change functions do not

work.

• Before connecting the power cord, connect all your speakers and AV components.

• Connect the power cord to the AV controller’s AC INLET.

• Plug the other end of the power cord into a suitable wall outlet.

•Turning on the AV controller may cause a momentary power surge that might interfere with other electrical equipment

on the same circuit. If this is a problem, plug the AV controller into a different branch circuit.

Connecting Onkyo Components

Step 1: Make sure that each Onkyo component is connected to the AV controller with an analog audio cable (RCA).

Step 2: Make the necessary connections (see illustration below).

Step 3: If you’re using an MD, CDR, or RI DOCK component, change the Input Display (see page 49).

GND

HDMI

IN 1IN 2IN 3IN 4

ASSIGNABLE

OUT

MAIN OUT

SUB

COLD

HOT GND

INPUT

BALANCE R FRONT R FRONT LSURR R CENTER SURR L

SURR BACK R

Bi-AMP

MONO

BALANCE L

RS232

DIGITAL

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

REMOTE

CONTROL

IN 1

IN 2

IN IN IN IN

PHONO CD TAPE AUX 1

GAME/TV

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

CBL/SAT

AUX 1 VCR/DVR

VCR/DVR DVD

DVD

IN 2

IN 3

ASSIGNABLE

(DVD)

(CBL/SAT)

(VCR/DVR)

(GAME/TV)

(CD)

OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

ASSIGNABLE

IN 3

CB/PB

CR/PR

IN 2 IN

1(DVD) MONITOR

OUT 1

OUT IN IN OUT IN IN FRONT FRONTCENTER

SUBWOOFER SUBWOOFER

CENTERSURR SURR

MULTI CH PRE OUT

SURR BACK SURR BACK

AC INLET

ETHERNET

MONITOR OUT 2

/ZONE 2 OUT

ZONE 2 ZONE 3

PRE OUT

12V TRIGGER OUT

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

ZONE 2

OUT

SIRIUS

FRONT

DVD

REMOTE

CONTROL

ANALOG

AUDIO OUT

ANALOG

AUDIO OUT

e.g., CD player

e.g., DVD player

Connecting the Power Cord

PR-SC885_En.book Page 42 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Turning On the AV Controller

STANDBY/ON

MASTER VOLUME

CDTUNER

TAPECBL/SAT GAME/TV AUX 1 AUX 2VCR/DVR

DVDAUDIO SELPURE AUDIO PHONO DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

OFF TONE HDMI OUT

DIGITAL INPUT

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

LEVEL

PHONES POWER

ON OFF

STEREO THX

RT/PTY/TP

MEMORY

LISTENING MODE

TUNING

MODE SETUP

PRESET

TUNING

TUNING RETURN

ENTER

SETUP MIC

VIDEO

S VIDEO DIGITAL

AUX 2 INPUT

AUDIOLR

CLEAR

STANDBY

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

STANDBY/ON

POWER

INPUT SELECTOR

ON STANDBY

DIMMER

CDR/MD

SAT

TAPE/AMP

SLEEP

MACRO

REMOTE MODE

---

10 11 12

TV CH

TV VOL

DVD

AUX1AUX

GAME/TV

CBL/SATVCR/DVR

D. TUN

TUNER

TAPE

PHONO

VCR

CABLE DOCK

DVD

RECEIVER

123

ZONE

INPUT

+10 0

CLEAR

123

456

789

RECEIVER

STANDBY

STANDBY indicator

Turning On and Standby

On the AV controller, press the [STANDBY/ON] button.

On the remote controller, press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE button,

followed by the [ON] button.

The AV controller comes on, the display lights up, and the STANDBY indicator goes

off.

Pressing the remote controller’s [ON] button again will turn on any components con-

nected via .

To turn the AV controller off, press the [STANDBY/ON] button, or press the remote

controller’s [STANDBY] button. The AV controller will enter Standby mode. To pre-

vent any loud surprises the next time you turn on the AV controller, turn down the

volume before you turn it off.

RECEIVER

STANDBY/ON

Remote

controller

AV controller

Up and Running in a Few Easy Steps

To get your system up and running with the minimum of fuss, here’s a few pointers to help you conﬁgure the AV

controller before you use it for the very ﬁrst time. These settings only need to be made once.

■Do the automatic speaker setup—this is essential!

See “Automatic Speaker Setup (Audyssey MultEQ XT)” on page 52.

■Did you connect your TV to an HDMI OUT or COMPONENT

VIDEO MONITOR OUT 1 or 2?

If you did, see “HDMI Monitor Setup” on page 45.

■Did you connect a component to an HDMI input,

component video input, or digital audio input?

If you did, see “HDMI Input Setup” on page 47, “Component Video

Input Setup” on page 48, or “Digital Input Setup” on page 49 respec-

tively.

■Did you connect an Onkyo MD recorder, CD recorder, or RI

Dock?

If you did, see “Changing the Input Display” on page 49.

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

HDMI

OUT IN

TAPE MD recorder, CD recorder,

RI Dock

PR-SC885_En.book Page 43 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

First Time Setup

This section explains the settings that you need to make before using the AV controller for the very ﬁrst time.

If you’ve fed your front speakers from the FRONT L/R

and SURR BACK L/R outputs for bi-amping, you must

change the Speaker Type setting. For hookup informa-

tion, see “Bi-amping the Front Speakers” on page 23.

Notes:

• When bi-amping is used, the AV controller is able to

feed up to 5.1 speakers in the main room.

• Before you change these settings, turn down the vol-

ume.

Note:

• This procedure can also be performed on the AV con-

troller by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow

buttons.

Speaker Settings

Press the [RECEIVER] button,

followed by the [SETUP] button.

The main menu appears onscreen.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “2. Speaker

Setup,” and then press [ENTER].

The Speaker Setup menu appears.

INPUT SELECTOR

DISPLAY MUTING

DIMMER

CDR/MD

SAT

TAPE/AMP

SLEEP

MACRO

REMOTE MODE

---

10 11 12

TV CH

TV VOL

PLAYLIST

RANDOM

AUX1AUX

GAME/TV

D. TUN

TUNER

TAPE

PHONO

REC

ENTER

VOL

DISC

ALBUM

VCR

CABLE DOCK

DVD

RECEIVER

123

ZONE

+10 0

CLEAR

456

789

2, 3 2–5

1, 6

If you change these settings, you must run the auto-

matic speaker setup again (see page 52).

RECEIVER

ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “1. Speaker Set-

tings,” and then press [ENTER].

The Speaker Settings menu appears.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “Speaker Type,”

and use the Left and Right

[ ]/[ ] buttons to select:

Normal:

Select this if you’ve con-

nected your front speakers

normally.

Bi-Amp:

Select this if you’ve con-

nected your front speakers for

bi-amped operation.

Press the [SETUP] button.

Setup closes.

ENTER

2-1.Speaker Settings

Speakers Type Normal

ENTER

PR-SC885_En.book Page 44 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

First Time Setup

—Continued

If you connect your TV to the COMPONENT VIDEO

MONITOR OUT 1 or COMPONENT VIDEO MON-

ITOR OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT, set the HDMI Monitor set-

ting to No so that the onscreen setup menus are displayed

and composite video and S-Video sources are upcon-

verted and output by the COMPONENT VIDEO MON-

ITOR OUT 1 and COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR

OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT.

If you connect your TV to the HDMI OUT MAIN or

HDMI OUT SUB, set the HDMI Monitor setting to

Main or Sub, respectively, so that the onscreen setup

menus are displayed and composite video, S-Video, and

component video sources are upconverted and output by

the HDMI OUT MAIN or HDMI OUT SUB.

You can specify the output resolution for the HDMI out-

puts and COMPONENT VIDEO outputs and have the

AV controller upconvert the picture resolution as neces-

sary to match the resolution supported by your TV.

HDMI Monitor Setup

Press the [RECEIVER] button,

followed by the [SETUP] button.

The main menu appears onscreen.

INPUT SELECTOR

LISTENING MODE

ON STANDBY

DISPLAY MUTING

DIMMER

CDR/MD

SAT

TAPE/AMP

SLEEP

MACRO

REMOTE MODE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

REPEAT

PLAY MODE

---

10 11 12

TV CH

TV VOL

PLAYLIST

RANDOM

DVD

AUX1AUX

GAME/TV

CBL/SATVCR/DVR

D. TUN

TUNER

TAPE

PHONO

REC

ENTER

SURR

DIRECT

THX

PURE A

STEREO

ALL ST

VOL

DISC

ALBUM

VCR

CABLE DOCK

DVD

RECEIVER

123

ZONE

INPUT

+10 0

CLEAR

123

456

789

2, 3 2–5

1, 6

RECEIVER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “1. Input/Output

Assign,” and then press

[ENTER].

The Input/Output Assign menu

appears.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “1. Monitor

Out,” and then press [ENTER].

The Monitor Out menu appears.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “HDMI Monitor,”

and use the Left and Right

[ ]/[ ] buttons to select:

No:

Select this if your TV is con-

nected to the COMPONENT

VIDEO MONITOR OUT 1,

COMPONENT VIDEO

MONITOR OUT 2/ZONE 2

OUT, S MONITOR OUT, or

V MONITOR OUT.

Main:

Select this if your TV is con-

nected to the HDMI OUT

MAIN.

Sub:

Select this if your TV is con-

nected to the HDMI OUT

SUB.

Note:

• When Main or Sub is selected, the

onscreen setup menus are output by

only the HDMI outputs.

If you’re

not using the HDMI outputs and

select Main or Sub by mistake and

the menus disappear, press the AV

controller’s [HDMI OUT] button

so that “HDMI Monitor: No”

appears on the display.

ENTER

1-1.Monitor Out

HDMI Monitor Main

Resolution

Monitor Out2

ENTER

PR-SC885_En.book Page 45 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

First Time Setup

—Continued

Notes:

• If the video source contains information that restricts

output at high-resolutions, 720p or 1080i content will

not be converted.

•See page 27 for charts showing how the HDMI Moni-

tor setting affects the video signal ﬂow through the AV

controller.

• This procedure can also be performed on the AV con-

troller by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow

buttons.

Using the HDMI OUT Button

The HDMI Monitor setting can also be set to No, Main,

or Sub by using the [HDMI OUT] button on the AV con-

troller.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “Resolution,”

and use the Left and Right

[ ]/[ ] buttons to select:

Through:

Select this to pass video

through the AV controller at

the same resolution and with

no conversion.

Auto:

Select this to have the AV

controller automatically con-

vert video at resolutions not

supported by your TV. (Not

available when the HDMI

Monitor setting is set to No.)

480p:

Select this for 480p output

and video conversion as nec-

essary.

720p:

Select this for 720p output

and video conversion as nec-

essary.

1080i:

Select this for 1080i output

and video conversion as nec-

essary.

1080p:

Select this for 1080p output

and video conversion as nec-

essary. (Not available when

the HDMI Monitor setting is

set to No.)

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “Monitor Out2,”

and use the Left and Right

[ ]/[ ] buttons to select:

Monitor:

Select this if you’ve con-

nected the COMPONENT

VIDEO MONITOR

OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT to a TV

or other component in your

main room.

Zone 2:

Select this if you’ve con-

nected the COMPONENT

VIDEO MONITOR

OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT to a TV

in Zone 2.

When Monitor is selected, the COM-

PONENT VIDEO MONITOR

OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT outputs the same

video as the COMPONENT VIDEO

MONITOR OUT 1.

ENTER

Press the [HDMI OUT] button.

The current setting is displayed.

Press the [HDMI OUT] button

repeatedly to select:

No:

Select this if your TV is con-

nected to the COMPONENT

VIDEO MONITOR OUT, S

MONITOR OUT, or V MON-

ITOR OUT.

Main:

Select this if your TV is con-

nected to the HDMI OUT

MAIN.

Sub:

Select this if your TV is con-

nected to the HDMI OUT

SUB.

Note:

• When Main or Sub is selected, the

onscreen setup menus are output by

only the HDMI outputs.

If you’re

not using the HDMI outputs and

select Main or Sub by mistake and

the menus disappear, press the

[HDMI OUT] button to select No.

STANDBY/ON

MASTER VOLUME

CDTUNER

TAPECBL/SAT GAME/TV AUX 1 AUX 2VCR/DVR

DVDAUDIO SELPURE AUDIO PHONO DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

OFF TONE HDMI OUT

DIGITAL INPUT

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

LEVEL

PHONES POWER

ON OFF

STEREO THX

RT/PTY/TP

MEMORY

LISTENING MODE

TUNING

MODE SETUP

PRESET

TUNING

TUNING RETURN

ENTER

SETUP MIC

VIDEO

S VIDEO DIGITAL

AUX 2 INPUT

AUDIOLR

CLEAR

STANDBY

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

1, 2

HDMI OUT

PR-SC885_En.book Page 46 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

First Time Setup

—Continued

If you connect a video component to an HDMI IN, you

must assign that input to an input selector. For example,

if you connect your DVD player to HDMI IN 1, you

must assign HDMI IN 1 to the DVD input selector.

By default, none of the HDMI inputs are assigned. The

following input selectors can be assigned: DVD,

VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME/TV, AUX 1, AUX 2.

If you’ve connected your TV to the AV controller with an

HDMI cable, you can set the AV controller so that com-

posite video, S-Video, and component video sources are

upconverted (

) and output by the HDMI outputs. You

can set this for each input selector by selecting the

“- - -” option.

Notes:

• Each HDMI IN cannot be assigned to more than one

input selector.

•

For composite video, S-Video, and component

video upconversion for the HDMI OUT MAIN or

HDMI OUT SUB, the HDMI Monitor setting must

be set to Main or Sub (see page 45).

See page 27 for

more information on video signal ﬂow and upconver-

sion.

•When an HDMI IN is assigned to an input selector as

explained here, the digital audio input for that input

selector is automatically set to the same HDMI IN.

See “Digital Input Setup” on page 49.

• This procedure can also be performed on the AV con-

troller by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow

buttons.

HDMI Input Setup

Press the [RECEIVER] button,

followed by the [SETUP] button.

The main menu appears onscreen.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “1. Input/Output

Assign,” and then press

[ENTER].

The Input/Output Assign menu

appears.

DISPLAY MUTING

DIMMER

CDR/MD

SAT

TAPE/AMP

SLEEP

REMOTE MODE

ENTER

VOL

DISC

ALBUM

VCR

CABLE DOCK

DVD

RECEIVER

123

ZONE

2, 3 2–4

1, 5

OUT

(*)

Composite video, S-Video,

component video

Composite video, S-Video,

component video

HDMI

RECEIVER

ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “2. HDMI Input,”

and then press [ENTER].

The HDMI Input menu appears.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select an input selec-

tor, and use the Left and Right

[ ]/[ ] buttons to select:

IN1:

Select if the video component

is connected to HDMI IN 1.

IN2:

Select if the video component

is connected to HDMI IN 2.

IN3:

Select if the video component

is connected to HDMI IN 3.

IN4:

Select if the video component

is connected to HDMI IN 4.

- - -:

Select this to upconvert and

output composite video,

S-Video, and component

video sources from the HDMI

OUT.

Press the [SETUP] button.

Setup closes.

ENTER

1-2.HDMI Input

DVD ---

VCR/DVR ---

CBL/SAT ---

GAME/TV ---

AUX1 ---

AUX2 ---

ENTER

PR-SC885_En.book Page 47 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

First Time Setup

—Continued

If you connect a video component to a COMPONENT

VIDEO IN, you must assign that input to an input

selector. For example, if you connect your DVD player

to COMPONENT VIDEO IN 3, you must assign COM-

PONENT VIDEO IN 3 to the DVD input selector.

By default, the DVD input selector is assigned to COM-

PONENT VIDEO IN 1, and all of the other input selec-

tors (i.e., VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME/TV, AUX 1,

AUX 2, TAPE, CD, PHONO) are assigned to the “- - -”

option.

If you’ve connected your TV to the AV controller with a

component video cable, you can set the AV controller so

that composite video and S-Video sources are upcon-

verted (

) and output by the COMPONENT VIDEO

MONITOR OUT 1 or 2. You can set this for each input

selector by selecting the “- - -” option.

Notes:

•

For composite video and S-Video upconversion for

the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 1 or

2, the HDMI Monitor setting must be set to Main

or Sub (see page 45).

See page 27 for more informa-

tion on video signal ﬂow and upconversion.

• This procedure can also be performed on the AV con-

troller by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow

buttons.

Component Video Input Setup

Press the [RECEIVER] button,

followed by the [SETUP] button.

The main menu appears onscreen.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “1. Input/Output

Assign,” and then press [ENTER].

The Input/Output Assign menu

appears.

INPUT

SELECTOR

DISPLAY MUTING

DIMMER

CDR/MD

SAT

TAPE/AMP

SLEEP

MACRO

REMOTE MODE

ENTER

VOL

DISC

ALBUM

VCR

CABLE DOCK

DVD

RECEIVER

123

ZONE

2, 3 2–4

1, 5

OUT

(*)

Composite video, S-Video

Component video

RECEIVER

ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “3. Component

Video Input,” and then press

[ENTER].

The Component Video Input menu

appears.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select an input selec-

tor, and use the Left and Right

[ ]/[ ] buttons to select:

IN1:

Select if the video component

is connected to COMPO-

NENT VIDEO IN 1.

IN2:

Select if the video component

is connected to COMPO-

NENT VIDEO IN 2.

IN3:

Select if the video component

is connected to COMPO-

NENT VIDEO IN 3.

- - -:

Select to output composite

video and S-Video sources

from the COMPONENT

VIDEO OUT.

Press the [SETUP] button.

Setup closes.

ENTER

1-3.Component Video Input

DVD IN1

VCR/DVR ---

CBL/SAT ---

GAME/TV ---

AUX1 ---

AUX2 ---

ENTER

PR-SC885_En.book Page 48 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

First Time Setup

—Continued

If you connect an -capable Onkyo MiniDisc

recorder, CD recorder, or RI Dock to the TAPE IN/OUT

jacks, or connect an RI Dock to the GAME/TV jacks, for

to work properly, you must change this setting.

This setting can only be changed on the AV controller.

Note:

•DOCK can be selected for the TAPE input selector or

GAME/TV input selector, but not both at the same

time.

If you connect a component to a digital audio input, you

must assign that input to an input selector. For example,

if you connect your CD player to OPTICAL IN 2, you

must assign OPTICAL IN 2 to the CD input selector.

These are the default assignments.

Changing the Input Display

Press the [TAPE] or [GAME/TV]

input selector button so that

“TAPE” or “GAME/TV” appears

on the display.

Press and hold down the [TAPE]

or [GAME/TV] input selector but-

ton (about 3 seconds) to change

the setting.

Repeat this step to select MD, CDR, or

DOCK.

For the Tape input selector, the setting

changes in this order:

For the GAME/TV input selector, the

setting changes in this order:

GAME/TV

↔

DOCK

STANDBY/ON

MASTER VOLUME

CDTUNER

TAPECBL/SAT GAME/TV AUX 1 AUX 2VCR/DVR

DVDAUDIO SELPURE AUDIO PHONO DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

OFF TONE HDMI OUT

DIGITAL INPUT

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

LEVEL

PHONES POWER

ON OFF

STEREO THX

RT/PTY/TP

MEMORY

LISTENING MODE

TUNING

MODE SETUP

PRESET

TUNING

TUNING RETURN

ENTER

SETUP MIC

VIDEO

S VIDEO DIGITAL

AUX 2 INPUT

AUDIOLR

CLEAR

STANDBY

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

1, 2 1, 2

TAPE

GAME/TV

TAPE

GAME/TV

TAPE → MD → CDR

DOCK

→

Digital Input Setup

Input selector Audio input

DVD COAX1

VCR/DVR COAX2

CBL/SAT COAX3

GAME/TV OPT1

AUX 1 - - -

AUX 2 FRONT (Fixed)

TAPE - - -

TUNER - - -

CD OPT2

PHONO - - -

Press the [RECEIVER] button,

followed by the [SETUP] button.

The main menu appears onscreen.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “1. Input/Output

Assign,” and then press [ENTER].

The Input/Output Assign menu

appears.

INPUT SELECTOR

LISTENING MODE

DISPLAY MUTING

DIMMER

CDR/MD

SAT

TAPE/AMP

SLEEP

MACRO

REMOTE MODE

---

10 11 12

PLAYLIST

RANDOMREC

ENTER

VOL

DISC

ALBUM

VCR

CABLE DOCK

DVD

RECEIVER

123

ZONE

2, 3 2–4

1, 5

RECEIVER

ENTER

PR-SC885_En.book Page 49 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

First Time Setup

—Continued

Notes:

• Only FRONT can be assigned to the AUX 2 input

selector.

• The TUNER input selector cannot be assigned and is

ﬁxed at the “- - -” option.

•When an HDMI IN is assigned to an input selector in

“HDMI Video Setup” on page 47, this input assign-

ment is automatically set to the same HDMI IN. And

in addition to the usual inputs (e.g., COAX1, COAX2,

etc.), you can also select HDMI inputs.

• This procedure can also be performed on the AV con-

troller by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow

buttons.

Using the DIGITAL INPUT Button

Digital inputs can also be assigned to input selectors by

using the [DIGITAL INPUT] button on the AV con-

troller.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “4. Digital

Input,” and then press [ENTER].

The Digital Input menu appears.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select an input selec-

tor, and then use the Left and

Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to select:

COAX1

: Select if the component is

connected to DIGITAL

COAXIAL IN 1.

COAX2

: Select if the component is

connected to DIGITAL

COAXIAL IN 2.

COAX3

: Select if the component is

connected to DIGITAL

COAXIAL IN 3.

OPT1

: Select if the component is

connected to DIGITAL

OPTICAL IN 1.

OPT2

: Select if the component is

connected to DIGITAL

OPTICAL IN 2.

- - -:

Select if the component is

connected to an analog

input.

Press the [SETUP] button.

Setup closes.

ENTER

1-4.Digital Input

DVD COAX1

VCR/DVR COAX2

CBL/SAT COAX3

GAME/TV OPT1

AUX1 ---

AUX2 FRONT

TAPE ---

TUNER ---

CD OPT2

PHONO ---

ENTER

Press the input selector button

for the input selector that you

want to assign.

Press the [DIGITAL INPUT]

button.

The current assignment is displayed.

Press the [DIGITAL INPUT] but-

ton repeatedly to select an

option.

Available options are the same as for

the Digital Input menu. See step 4 on

page 50.

STANDBY/ON

MASTER VOLUME

CDTUNER

TAPECBL/SAT GAME/TV AUX 1 AUX 2VCR/DVR

DVDAUDIO SELPURE AUDIO PHONO DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

OFF TONE HDMI OUT

DIGITAL INPUT

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

LEVEL

PHONES POWER

ON OFF

STEREO THX

RT/PTY/TP

MEMORY

LISTENING MODE

TUNING

MODE SETUP

PRESET

TUNING

TUNING RETURN

ENTER

SETUP MIC

VIDEO

S VIDEO DIGITAL

AUX 2 INPUT

AUDIOLR

CLEAR

STANDBY

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

2, 3

CDTUNER

TAPE

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV AUX 1 AUX 2

VCR/DVR

DVD

PHONO

DIGITAL INPUT

PR-SC885_En.book Page 50 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

First Time Setup

—Continued

If you connect a component to the AV controller’s analog

multichannel input, you must assign that input to an

input selector. For example, if you connect your DVD

player to the MULTI CH input, you must assign it to the

DVD input selector.

If you connect a component to the AV controller’s bal-

anced input, you must assign that input to an input

selector. For example, if you connect your CD player to

the BALANCED input, you must assign it to the CD

input selector.

Notes:

•To listen to the component connected to the multi-

channel input, press the [AUDIO SEL] button repeat-

edly to select Multich (see page 78).

• This procedure can also be performed on the AV con-

troller by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow

buttons.

Analog Input Setup

Press the [RECEIVER] button,

followed by the [SETUP] button.

The main menu appears onscreen.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “1. Input/Output

Assign,” and then press [ENTER].

The Input/Output Assign menu

appears.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “5. Analog

Input,” and then press [ENTER].

The Analog Input menu appears.

INPUT

SELECTOR

DISPLAY MUTING

DIMMER

CDR/MD

SAT

TAPE/AMP

SLEEP

MACRO

REMOTE MODE

ENTER

VOL

DISC

ALBUM

VCR

CABLE DOCK

DVD

RECEIVER

123

ZONE

2, 3 2–4

1, 5

RECEIVER

ENTER

1-5.Analog Input

Multich DVD

Balance

Balance Input

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “Multich,” and

use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select an input selec-

tor.

You can assign the multichannel input

to the following input selectors: DVD,

VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME/TV,

AUX 1, AUX 2, TAPE, CD, or

PHONO.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “Balance,” and

use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select an input selec-

tor.

You can assign the balanced input to the

following input selectors: DVD,

VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME/TV,

AUX 1, AUX 2, TAPE, CD, or

PHONO.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “Balance Input,”

and use the Left and Right

[ ]/[ ] buttons to select:

Stereo

:Select if the source is stereo

and you’ve connected it to

the BALANCED L and R

INPUT XLR jacks.

Mono

:Select if the source is mono

and you’ve connected it to

the BALANCED L INPUT

XLR jack.

Press the [SETUP] button.

Setup closes.

ENTER

PR-SC885_En.book Page 51 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

First Time Setup

—Continued

With the supplied speaker setup microphone, Audyssey

MultEQ XT can measure the number of speakers con-

nected, their sizes, crossover frequencies, and distances

from the listening position and calculate the optimal

speaker settings for you automatically.

Before using this function, connect and position all of

your speakers.

Measurement Positions

To create a listening environment in which several

people can enjoy your home theater simultaneously,

Audyssey MultEQ XT takes measurements at up to eight

positions within the listening area.

■

1st measurement position

This is the center position of your listening area, or

the listening position if there’s only one listener.

■

2nd–8th measurement positions

These are the other listening positions (i.e., the

places where the other listeners will sit). You can

measure up to eight positions.

The following examples show some typical home theater

seating arrangements. Choose the one that best matches

yours, and position the microphone accordingly when

prompted.

Using Audyssey MultEQ XT

Automatic Speaker Setup

(Audyssey MultEQ XT)

TV TV TV

TVTVTV

TV TV TV

Listening area

Listening position

Notes:

• If the AV controller is muted, it will be unmuted

automatically when the automatic speaker setup

starts.

• Automatic speaker setup cannot be performed

while a pair of headphones is connected.

• It takes about 15 minutes to complete the auto-

matic speaker setup for three positions. Total mea-

surement time varies depending on the number of

positions and speakers.

• Do not disconnect the speaker setup microphone

during the automatic speaker setup, unless you

want to cancel the setup.

•Do not connect or disconnect any speakers during

the automatic speaker setup.

INPUT SELECTOR

ON STANDBY

DISPLAY MUTING

DIMMER

CDR/MD

SAT

TAPE/AMP

SLEEP

MACRO

REMOTE MODE

---

10 11 12

TV CH

TV VOL

PLAYLIST

RANDOM

DVD

AUX1AUX

GAME/TV

CBL/SATVCR/DVR

D. TUN

TUNER

TAPE

PHONO

REC

ENTER

VOL

DISC

ALBUM

VCR

CABLE DOCK

DVD

RECEIVER

123

ZONE

INPUT

+10 0

CLEAR

123

456

789

ENTER ,

STANDBY/ON

MASTER VOLUME

CDTUNER

TAPECBL/SAT GAME/TV AUX 1 AUX 2VCR/DVR

DVDAUDIO SELPURE AUDIO PHONO DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

OFF TONE HDMI OUT

DIGITAL INPUT

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

LEVEL

PHONES POWER

ON OFF

STEREO THX

RT/PTY/TP

MEMORY

LISTENING MODE

TUNING

MODE SETUP

PRESET

TUNING

TUNING RETURN

ENTER

SETUP MIC

VIDEO

S VIDEO DIGITAL

AUX 2 INPUT

AUDIOLR

CLEAR

STANDBY

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

SETUP MIC

2, 9

PR-SC885_En.book Page 52 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

First Time Setup

—Continued

Turn on the AV controller and the

connected TV.

On the TV, select the input to which the

AV controller is connected.

Place the setup microphone at

the 1st measurement position,

and connect it to the SETUP MIC

jack.

Notes:

• Make sure the microphone is hori-

zontal.

• If there’s an obstacle between the

microphone and any speaker, the

automatic setup will not work cor-

rectly. Set up the room as you would

when enjoying a DVD movie.

• Positioning the microphone close to

where your ears would normally be

will provide the best results. You can

set the height of the microphone by

using a tripod or level table.

Press [ENTER].

A test tone is output by each speaker in

turn, as Audyssey MultEQ XT deter-

mines which speakers are connected.

This takes a few minutes.

Note:

• If any extraneous noise is picked up

by the microphone, the automatic

setup may not work correctly, so

keep quiet.

SETUP MIC

Auto Speaker Setup

Please place microphone at center

of listening area at ear height.

Push Enter : Next

AUDYSSEY

ENTER

Auto Speaker Setup

Do not unplug microphone.

Please keep quiet.

Now Measuring...

AUDYSSEY

The speaker detect results

appear.

“Yes” means that the speaker was

detected. “No” means that no speaker

was detected.

If you agree with the results, use

the Up and Down [ ]/[ ] but-

tons to select Next, and then

press [ENTER].

The options are:

Proceed to the next step.

Retry:

Return to step 2 and try again.

Cancel:

Cancel the automatic speaker

setup.

The following screen appears.

Place the setup microphone at

the next position (see page 52),

and then press [ENTER].

Audyssey MultEQ XT performs more

measurements. This takes a few min-

utes.

When prompted, place the setup

microphone at the next position,

and repeat step 5.

ENTER

Auto Speaker Setup

-----SP Detect Result-----

FL : Yes FR : Yes

SL : Yes SR : Yes

SBL : Yes SBR : Yes

C : No SW : Yes

Retry

Cancel

AUDYSSEY

ENTER

Auto Speaker Setup

Please place microphone at

2nd Position at ear height.

Push Enter : Next

AUDYSSEY

Auto Speaker Setup

Do not unplug microphone.

Please keep quiet.

Now Measuring...

AUDYSSEY

PR-SC885_En.book Page 53 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

First Time Setup

—Continued

Notes:

• When the automatic speaker setup is complete, the

Equalizer Settings (page 99) will be set to Audyssey.

•You can cancel the automatic speaker setup at any

point in the procedure simply by disconnecting the

setup microphone.

Error Messages

During the automatic speaker setup, one of the following

error messages may appear:

❑

Ambient noise is too high

This message appears if there’s too much background

noise and the measurements cannot be performed prop-

erly. Remove the source of the noise and try again, or

cancel the automatic speaker setup.

After the 3rd and 7th measurements,

the following screen appears.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select an option, and

then press [ENTER].

Select this if you want to mea-

sure another listening posi-

tion. After the 8th

measurement has been taken,

the procedure automatically

proceeds to step 8.

Finish (Calculate):

Select this if you

don’t want to measure any

more listening positions and

are ready to calculate the

results, then go to step 8.

When the measurements are

complete, the following screen

appears.

When the calculations are com-

plete, the following screen

appears.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select an option, and

then press [ENTER].

Save:

Save the calculated settings

and exit the automatic

speaker setup.

Review SP Conﬁg:

Review the

speaker conﬁguration settings

(see “Reviewing the Results”

on page 56).

ENTER

Auto Speaker Setup

Please select “Next”, when measuring

next position, and select “finish”,

when ending.

finish(Calculate)

AUDYSSEY

Auto Speaker Setup

Calculating...

AUDYSSEY

ENTER

Auto Speaker Setup

Save

Review SP Config

Review SP Distance

Review SP Level

Cancel

AUDYSSEY

Review SP Distance:

Review the

speaker distance settings (see

“Reviewing the Results” on

page 56).

Review SP Level:

Review the speaker

level settings (see “Reviewing

the Results” on page 56).

Cancel:

Cancel the automatic speaker

setup.

If you selected “Save,” the results are

saved, and the following screen

appears.

Disconnect the setup micro-

phone.

Auto Speaker Setup

Saving...

AUDYSSEY

Auto Speaker Setup

Please unplug microphone.

AUDYSSEY

Auto Speaker Setup

Ambient noise is too high.

Retry

Cancel

AUDYSSEY

PR-SC885_En.book Page 54 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

First Time Setup

—Continued

❑

Speaker Detect Error

This message appears if a speaker is not detected. “Yes”

means that a speaker was detected. “No” means that no

speaker was detected. Check your speaker connections

and retry, or cancel the automatic speaker setup.

One of the front speakers has not been detected.

One of the surround speakers has not been detected.

The surround back speakers have been detected but the

surround speakers haven’t.

The right surround back speaker has been detected but

the left surround back speaker hasn’t.

There is a problem with a speaker. The speaker may be

broken or the subwoofer may be emitting sound that is

too high.

A different number of speakers has been detected.

❑

Writing Error

This message appears if saving fails. Try saving again, or

cancel the automatic speaker setup.

If this message appears repeatedly, the AV controller

may be malfunctioning and you should contact the

dealer from whom you purchased this unit.

Auto Speaker Setup

-----Speaker Detect Error-----

FL : Yes FR : Yes

SL : Yes SR : Yes

SBL : Yes SBR : Yes

C : No SW : Yes

Retry

Cancel

AUDYSSEY

Auto Speaker Setup

-----Speaker Detect Error-----

FL : Yes FR : No

SL : --- SR : ---

SBL : --- SBR : ---

C : Yes SW : ---

Retry

Cancel

AUDYSSEY

Auto Speaker Setup

-----Speaker Detect Error-----

FL : Yes FR : Yes

SL : --- SR : No

SBL : --- SBR : ---

C : Yes SW : ---

Retry

Cancel

AUDYSSEY

Auto Speaker Setup

-----Speaker Detect Error-----

FL : Yes FR : Yes

SL : --- SR : No

SBL : --- SBR : Yes

C : Yes SW : ---

Retry

Cancel

AUDYSSEY

Auto Speaker Setup

-----Speaker Detect Error-----

FL : Yes FR : Yes

SL : --- SR : Yes

SBL : No SBR : Yes

C : Yes SW : ---

Retry

Cancel

AUDYSSEY

Auto Speaker Setup

-----Speaker Detect Error-----

FL : Error FR : Yes

SL : Yes SR : Yes

SBL : Yes SBR : Yes

C : Yes SW : Yes

Retry

Cancel

AUDYSSEY

Auto Speaker Setup

Speaker Detect Error

Retry

Cancel

AUDYSSEY

Auto Speaker Setup

Writing Error!

Retry

Cancel

AUDYSSEY

PR-SC885_En.book Page 55 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

First Time Setup

—Continued

Reviewing the Results

Changing the Speaker Settings Manually

In some cases, the measurements taken by the automatic

speaker setup may not provide usable results. If running

the speaker setup a second time doesn’t help, you’ll have

to set the speaker settings manually (see pages 94–99).

Notes:

•For THX-certiﬁed speakers, the 80 Hz (THX) cross-

over frequency is recommended. If you use the auto-

matic speaker setup, you’ll need to manually select

80 Hz (THX) for each THX-certiﬁed speaker (see

page 94).

•Because of the complexities of low-frequency sounds

and the way they interact with a room, THX recom-

mends setting the subwoofer level and distance manu-

ally.

Using a Powered Subwoofer

If you’re using a powered subwoofer, as it outputs very

low-frequency sound and its position is usually low

down, it may not be detected by the automatic speaker

setup. In this case, increase the subwoofer’s volume,

select its highest crossover frequency, and then try run-

ning the automatic speaker setup again. Note that if the

volume is set too high and the sound distorts, it may not

be detected, so use an appropriate volume level. If the

subwoofer has a low-pass ﬁlter switch, set it to Off or

Direct. Refer to your subwoofer’s instruction manual for

details.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select the settings that

you want to review, and then

press [ENTER].

The options are:

Review SP Conﬁg

Review the speaker conﬁguration

settings.

Review SP Distance

Review the speaker distance set-

tings.

Review SP Level

Review the speaker level settings.

Press [RETURN] to return to the pre-

vious screen.

ENTER

Auto Speaker Setup

Save

Review SP Config

Review SP Distance

Review SP Level

Cancel

AUDYSSEY

Auto Speaker Setup

Review SP Config

Subwoofer : Yes

Front : Full Band

Center : 80Hz

Surround : 100Hz

Surr Back : 150Hz

Surr Back Ch : 2ch

AUDYSSEY

Auto Speaker Setup

Review SP Distance

Left : 15ft

Center : 15ft

Right : 15ft

Surr Right : 7ft

Surr Back R : 7ft

Surr Back L : 7ft

Surr Left : 7ft

Subwoofer : 15ft

AUDYSSEY

Auto Speaker Setup

Review SP Level

Left : +12dB

Center : 0dB

Right : –12dB

Surr Right : +3dB

Surr Back R : +4dB

Surr Back L : -6dB

Surr Left : -3dB

Subwoofer : 0dB

AUDYSSEY

PR-SC885_En.book Page 56 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Playing Your AV Components

Basic AV Controller Operation

STANDBY/ON

MASTER VOLUME

CDTUNER

TAPECBL/SAT GAME/TV AUX 1 AUX 2VCR/DVR

DVDAUDIO SELPURE AUDIO PHONO DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

STANDBY

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

INPUT SELECTOR

ON STANDBY

DISPLAY MUTING

DIMMER

CDR/MD

SAT

TAPE/AMP

SLEEP

MACRO

REMOTE MODE

---

10 11 12

TV CH

TV VOL

DVD

AUX1AUX

GAME/TV

CBL/SATVCR/DVR

D. TUN

TUNER

TAPE

PHONO

ENTER

VOL

DISC

ALBUM

VCR

CABLE DOCK

DVD

RECEIVER

123

ZONE

INPUT

+10 0

CLEAR

123

456

789

Use the AV controller’s input selector buttons to select an input source.

To select an input source with the remote controller, press its

[RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE button, and then use its INPUT SELECTOR

buttons.

Start playback on the source component.

To watch a DVD or other video source, on your TV, select the video input that’s con-

nected to the AV controller’s COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 1, COMPO-

NENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT, HDMI OUT MAIN, HDMI OUT

SUB, or MONITOR OUT.

On some DVD players, you may need to change the digital or HDMI audio output

settings.

To adjust the volume, use the MASTER VOLUME control or the remote

controller’s [VOL] button.

Since the AV controller is designed for home theaters, it has a wide volume range for

precise adjustment. The volume can be set to –

∞

dB, –81.5 dB, –81.0 dB through

+18.0 dB.

Select a listening mode and enjoy!

See “Using the Listening Modes” on page 79.

RECEIVER

DVD

AUX1AUX

GAME/TV

CBL/SATVCR/DVR

TUNER

TAPE

PHONO

+10

123

456

789

CDTUNER

TAPE

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV AUX 1 AUX 2

VCR/DVR

DVD

PHONO

Remote

controller

AV controller

VOL

Remote

controller

AV controller

MASTER VOLUME

PR-SC885_En.book Page 57 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Listening to the Radio

With the built-in tuner, you can enjoy AM and FM radio

stations and store your favorite stations as presets for

easy selection.

Tuning into AM/FM Radio Stations

■

Auto Tuning Mode

When tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator

appears. When tuned into a stereo FM station, the FM

STEREO indicator also appears.

■

Manual Tuning Mode

The FM frequency changes in 0.2 MHz steps, 10 kHz

steps for AM.

In Manual Tuning mode, FM stations will be in mono.

Tuning into Weak FM Stereo Stations

If the signal from a stereo FM station is weak, it may be

impossible to get good reception. In this case, switch to

Manual Tuning mode and listen to the station in mono.

Listening to AM/FM Stations

Use the [TUNER] input selector

button to select AM or FM.

In this example, FM has been selected.

(Actual display depends on country.)

Press the [TUNING MODE] button

so that the AUTO indicator

appears on the display.

Press the TUNING Up or Down

[ ]/[ ] button.

Searching stops when a station is

found.

STANDBY/ON

MASTER VOLUME

CDTUNER

TAPECBL/SAT GAME/TV AUX 1 AUX 2VCR/DVR

DVDAUDIO SELPURE AUDIO PHONO DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

OFF TONE HDMI OUT

DIGITAL INPUT

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

LEVEL

PHONES POWER

ON OFF

STEREO THX

RT/PTY/TP

MEMORY

LISTENING MODE

TUNING

MODE SETUP

PRESET

TUNING

TUNING RETURN

ENTER

SETUP MIC

VIDEO

S VIDEO DIGITAL

AUX 2 INPUT

AUDIOLR

CLEAR

STANDBY

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

TUNING

TUNER

TUNING MODE

TUNER

Band Frequency

TUNING

MODE

TUNING

AUTO

TUNED

FM STEREO

Press the [TUNING MODE] button

so that the AUTO indicator disap-

pears from the display.

Press and hold the TUNING Up or

Down [ ]/[ ] button.

The frequency stops changing when

you release the button.

Press the button repeatedly to change

the frequency one step at a time.

TUNING

MODE

TUNING

PR-SC885_En.book Page 58 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Listening to the Radio

—Continued

■

Tuning into Stations by Frequency

You can tune into AM and FM stations directly by enter-

ing the appropriate frequency.

Displaying AM/FM Radio Information

Note:

• When you select a preset with a custom name (see

page 102), its name is displayed instead of the band

and frequency.

Press the [RECEIVER] button,

followed by the [D.TUN] button.

The [RECEIVER] button ﬂashes.

(Actual display depends on country.)

Within 8 seconds, use the num-

ber buttons to enter the fre-

quency of the radio station.

For example, to tune to 87.5 (FM),

press 8, 7, 5.

Note:

While the [RECEIVER] button is ﬂash-

ing, you cannot select another input

source with the remote controller.

INPUT SELECTOR

ON STANDBY

DIMMER

CDR/MD

SAT

TAPE/AMP

SLEEP

MACRO

REMOTE MODE

---

10 11 12

TV CH

TV VOL

DVD

AUX1AUX

GAME/TV

CBL/SATVCR/DVR

D. TUN

TUNER

TAPE

PHONO

VCR

CABLE DOCK

DVD

RECEIVER

123

ZONE

INPUT

+10 0

CLEAR

123

456

789

D.TUN

RECEIVER

Number

buttons

RECEIVER

D. TUN

CLEAR

DVD

AUX1AUX

GAME/TV

CBL/SATVCR/DVR

TUNER

TAPE

PHONO

+10 0

123

456

789

Press the [DISPLAY] button to

display the available information.

STANDBY/ON

MASTER VOLUME

CDTUNER

TAPECBL/SAT GAME/TV AUX 1 AUX 2VCR/DVR

DVDAUDIO SELPURE AUDIO PHONO DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

STANDBY

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

DISPLAY

Band

Listening mode

Frequency Preset #

PR-SC885_En.book Page 59 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Listening to the Radio

—Continued

HD Radio technology brings digital radio to conven-

tional analog AM and FM radio stations, with improved

sound quality, better reception, and new data services.

HD Radio technology provides CD-quality sound for

FM stations and FM-quality sound for AM stations. In

addition, FM HD Radio stations can transmit multiple

programs on the same frequency by using multicast

channels. Text data display incudes station name, song

title, artist name, and so on.

For more information about HD Radio technology, visit:

www.ibiquity.com

www.hdradio.com

About HD Radio Stations

HD Radio stations broadcast on the same AM and FM

frequencies they’ve always used, and you can receive

them by tuning into your favorite station as normal (see

page 58). You can store them as presets just like AM and

FM stations (see page 75).

If the current AM or FM station supports HD Radio tech-

nology, the HD indicator lights up.

While a digital HD Radio transmission is being received,

the DIGITAL indicator lights up. While an analog HD

Radio transmission is being received, the ANALOG

indicator lights up.

• If the current AM or FM station supports HD Radio

technology, the station’s name will be displayed

instead of the band and frequency.

•When music data is received, song title and artist name

information is displayed.

• If the current HD Radio station supports multicast

channels, the name of the currently selected multicast

channel will be displayed.

Listening to HD Radio™ Stations

HD indicator

HD Radio channel number

Station name

Artist nameSong title

INPUT SELECTOR

LISTENING MODE

DISPLAY MUTING

RC-

690

DIMMER

CDR/MD

SAT

TAPE/AMP

SLEEP

MACRO

REMOTE MODE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

REPEAT

PLAY MODE

---

10 11 12

VIDEO OFFOPEN/CLOSE

TV VOL

PLAYLIST

RANDOM

D. TUN

TUNER

TAPE

PHONO

VCRVCR DVDDVD HDDHDD

REC

ENTER

TEST TONE

AUDIO SEL

CH SEL

SURR

DIRECT

THX

PURE A

STEREO

LEVEL

L NIGHT

ALL ST

VOL

DISC

ALBUM

VCR

CABLE DOCK

DVD

RECEIVER

123

ZONE

+10 0

CLEAR

456

789

Re-EQ

DISPLAY

ENTER

AUDIO SEL

STANDBY/ON

MASTER VOLUME

CDTUNER

TAPECBL/SAT GAME/TV AUX 1 AUX 2VCR/DVR

DVDAUDIO SELPURE AUDIO PHONO DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

OFF TONE HDMI OUT

DIGITAL INPUT

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

LEVEL

PHONES POWER

ON OFF

STEREO THX

RT/PTY/TP

MEMORY

LISTENING MODE

TUNING

MODE SETUP

PRESET

TUNING

TUNING RETURN

ENTER

SETUP MIC

VIDEO

S VIDEO DIGITAL

AUX 2 INPUT

AUDIOLR

CLEAR

STANDBY

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

AUDIO SEL

ENTER DISPLAY

PR-SC885_En.book Page 60 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Listening to the Radio

—Continued

Selecting Multicast Channels

FM HD Radio stations can transmit multiple programs

on the same frequency by using what are called

multicast

channels.

If the current HD Radio station is broadcasting

multicast channels, the SPS (secondary program ser-

vices) indicator lights up.

Selecting the Audio Format (Blend Mode)

HD Radio stations transmit both analog and digital ver-

sions of their programs and you can choose which one

you want to listen to.

Note:

•Multicast channels 2 through 8 only carry a digital sig-

nal, so to select an audio format, you must select mul-

ticast channel #1 ﬁrst.

Displaying HD Radio Information

Press the [DISPLAY] button repeatedly to cycle through

the available information.

Press [ENTER].

The SPS indicator ﬂashes.

Use the Up and Down Arrow

[]/[ ] buttons to select a multi-

cast channel, and then press

[ENTER] within 5 seconds.

If you select a multicast channel that is

not currently broadcasting, a plus [+]

symbol will appear, indicating that the

channel has been reserved. When

broadcasting commences, that channel

will be selected automatically.

Note:

• Multicast channels are not available

on AM.

Use the [AUDIO SEL] button to

select Auto or Analog.

Auto:

Select to use the digital sig-

nal.

Analog:

Select to use the analog sig-

nal.

ENTER

Reserved channel indication

HD Radio channel number

AUDIO SEL

Remote

controller

AV controller

Station information

Artist information

Song title information

Frequency

PR-SC885_En.book Page 61 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Listening to the Radio

—Continued

Note:

Hardware and required monthly subscription sold sepa-

rately. Other fees and taxes, including a one-time activa-

tion fee may apply. Subscription fee is consumer only.

All fees and programming subject to change. Channels

with frequent explicit language are indicated with an XL.

Channel blocking is available for XM radio receivers by

calling 1-800-XMRADIO (US residents) and

1-877-GET-XMSR (Canadian residents).

For a full listing of the XM commercial-free channels

and advertising-supported channels, visit

lineup.xmradio.com (US residents) or xmradio.ca

(Canadian residents).

Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement available

at xmradio.com (US residents) and xmradio.ca (Cana-

dian residents). Only available in the 48 contiguous

property of their respective owners.

A warning against reverse engineering:

It is prohibited to, and you agree that you will not, copy,

decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manip-

ulate, or otherwise access and/or make available any

technology incorporated in receivers compatible with

the XM Satellite Radio system. Furthermore, the

AMBE

voice compression software included in this

product is protected by intellectual property rights

including patent rights, copyrights, and trade secrets of

Digital Voice Systems, Inc. The software is licensed

solely for use within this product. The user of this or any

other software contained in an XM Radio is explicitly

prohibited from attempting to copy, decompile, reverse

engineer, hack, manipulate or disassemble the object

code, or in any other way convert the object code into

human-readable form.

Connecting the XM Mini-Tuner and Home

Dock

To receive XM Satellite Radio, you need an XM Mini-

Tuner and Home Dock, which includes a home antenna.

These are sold separately. For connection information,

refer to the instruction manual supplied with the XM

Mini-Tuner and Home Dock.

Setting the Satellite Radio Mode

Before you can listen to XM Satellite Radio, you must

set the Satellite Radio mode to XM.

Listening to XM Satellite Radio

Important XM Radio Information

XM Satellite Radio offers an extraordinary variety of

commercial-free music, plus the best in sports, news,

talk and entertainment. XM is broadcast in superior

digital audio from coast to coast. From rock to reg-

gae, from classical to hip hop, XM has something for

every music fan. XM’s dedication to playing the rich-

est selection of music is matched by its passion for

live sporting events, talk radio, up-to-the-minute

news, stand-up comedy, children’s programming, and

much more. For U.S. customers, information about

XM Satellite Radio is available online at www.xmra-

dio.com. For Canadian customers, information about

XM Canada is online at

www.xmradio.ca.

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE

MODE button, followed by the

[SETUP] button.

The main menu appears onscreen.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “7. Hardware

Setup,” and then press [ENTER].

The Hardware Setup menu appears.

SIRIUS

XM Mini-Tuner jack

INPUT SELECTOR

DISPLAY MUTING

DIMMER

CDR/MD

SAT

TAPE/AMP

SLEEP

MACRO

REMOTE MODE

---

10 11 12

PLAYLIST

RANDOMREC

ENTER

VOL

DISC

ALBUM

VCR

CABLE DOCK

DVD

RECEIVER

123

ZONE

RECEIVER

SETUP

ENTER

RECEIVER

ENTER

7.Hardware Setup

1.Remote Control

2.Zone2/Zone3

3.Tuner

4.Analog Multich

5.HDMI

PR-SC885_En.book Page 62 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Listening to the Radio

—Continued

Selecting XM Satellite Radio

Signing Up for XM Satellite Radio

Once you have installed the XM Mini-Tuner and Home

Dock, you are ready to subscribe to XM Satellite Radio.

You’ll need a major credit card and your XM Radio ID.

There are three places you can ﬁnd your 8-character XM

Radio ID:

1. On the XM Mini-Tuner

2. On the XM Mini-Tuner packaging

3. On XM Channel 0, as explained below

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “3. Tuner,” and

then press [ENTER].

The Tuner screen appears.

Use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “XM.”

If there are 2 items on the Tuner

screen, use Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “Satellite

Radio.”

Pressing the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]

buttons cycles through the following

options: None

→

SIRIUS

→

SIRIUS

None

: Select if you’re not using

satellite radio.

: Select to use XM Satellite

Radio.

SIRIUS

:Select to use SIRIUS Satel-

lite Radio.

XM/SIRIUS

:Select to use XM Satel-

lite Radio and SIRIUS Sat-

ellite Radio.

When you’ve ﬁnished, press the

[SETUP] button.

Setup closes.

ENTER

7-3.Tuner

Satellite Radio None

ENTER

STANDBY/ON

MASTER VOLUME

CDTUNER

TAPECBL/SAT GAME/TV AUX 1 AUX 2VCR/DVR

DVDAUDIO SELPURE AUDIO PHONO DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

OFF TONE HDMI OUT

DIGITAL INPUT

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

LEVEL

PHONES POWER

ON OFF

STEREO THX

RT/PTY/TP

MEMORY

LISTENING MODE

TUNING

MODE SETUP

PRESET

TUNING

TUNING RETURN

ENTER

SETUP MIC

VIDEO

S VIDEO DIGITAL

AUX 2 INPUT

AUDIOLR

CLEAR

STANDBY

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

TUNER

SETUP

ENTER

TUNING /

On the AV controller, press the

[TUNER] input selector button

repeatedly to select XM.

On the remote controller, press

the [RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE

button, and then press the

[TUNER] INPUT SELECTOR but-

ton repeatedly to select XM.

If “CHECK XM TUNER” appears on

the display, make sure the XM Mini-

Tuner is connected properly.

Use the Tuning Up and Down

[ ]/[ ] buttons to select RADIO

ID.

Your XM Radio ID number is dis-

played. Write it below for reference.

INPUT SELECTOR

ON STANDBY

DISPLAY MUTING

DIMMER

CDR/MD

SAT

TAPE/AMP

SLEEP

MACRO

REMOTE MODE

---

10 11 12

TV CH

TV VOL

DVD

AUX1AUX

GAME/TV

CBL/SATVCR/DVR

D. TUN

TUNER

TAPE

PHONO

ENTER

VOL

DISC

ALBUM

VCR

CABLE DOCK

DVD

RECEIVER

123

ZONE

INPUT

+10 0

CLEAR

123

456

789

RECEIVER

TUNER D.TUN

ENTER

Number

buttons

TUNER

Remote

controller

AV controller

RECEIVER

TUNING

PR-SC885_En.book Page 63 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Listening to the Radio

—Continued

Notes:

• RADIO ID cannot be selected in Category Search

mode. You must select Channel Search mode (see

right column).

• The following letters are not used in XM Satellite

Radio IDs: I, O, S, F.

• XM Satellite Radio will transmit a special signal to

your AV controller to activate the full channel lineup.

Activation normally takes between 10 and 15 minutes,

but during busy peak periods, you may need to leave

the AV controller turned on for up to an hour.

Selecting XM Radio Channels

There are three ways to select XM radio channels:

Channel Search mode:

select any channel.

Category Search mode:

select channels by cate-

gory.

Direct tuning:

enter channel number.

Note:

You can’t select Channel Search mode or Category

Search mode while the Tuning Arrow indicators

are ﬂashing, as tuning is in progress.

■

Channel Search Mode

■

Category Search Mode

■

Direct Tuning

You can select an XM radio channel directly by entering

its number.

To sign up, go to:

http://activate.xmradio.com

Or call: 1-800-967-2346

For XM Canada, go to:

http://xmradio.ca

Or call: 1-877-438-9677

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE

MODE button, and then press the

[ENTER] button repeatedly to

select Channel Search mode.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select a channel.

You can also use the Left and Right

[ ]/[ ] buttons to select a category.

ENTER

RECEIVER

ENTER

Channel name

Channel number

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE

MODE button, and then press the

[ENTER] button repeatedly to

select Category Search mode.

Use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select a category, and

use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select a channel in

that category.

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE

MODE button, followed by the

[D.TUN] button.

The [RECEIVER] button ﬂashes.

Within 8 seconds, use the num-

ber buttons to enter the channel

number.

For example, to select channel #20,

press 0, 2, 0, or 2, 0, [ENTER].

Note:

While the [RECEIVER] button is ﬂash-

ing, you cannot select another input

source with the remote controller.

ENTER

RECEIVER

ENTER

RECEIVER

D. TUN

CLEAR

DVD

AUX1AUX

GAME/TV

CBL/SATVCR/DVR

TUNER

TAPE

123

456

789

11 12

D. TUN

CLEAR

PR-SC885_En.book Page 64 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Listening to the Radio

—Continued

Selecting Channels on the AV controller:

Selecting the Previous Channel:

Displaying XM Radio Information

The following information can be displayed:

Notes:

• If the category, artist, or song title is not available,

“- - -” will be displayed instead.

• The listening mode is not displayed when Zone 2 or

Zone 3 is selected.

Positioning the XM Mini-Tuner System

You can check the signal strength of the XM radio signal

and adjust the position of the XM Mini-Tuner system

accordingly.

Press the [TUNING MODE] button

repeatedly to select Channel

Search mode or Category Search

mode.

Press [ENTER] repeatedly to

select a category.

Use the Tuning Up and Down [ ]/

[] buttons to select a channel.

In Channel Search mode, you can

select any channel.

In Category Search mode, you can only

select channels from the currently

selected category.

To listen to the previously

selected XM channel, press the

[RETURN] button.

STANDBY/ON

MASTER VOLUME

CDTUNER

TAPECBL/SAT GAME/TV AUX 1 AUX 2VCR/DVR

DVDAUDIO SELPURE AUDIO PHONO DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

OFF TONE HDMI OUT

DIGITAL INPUT

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

LEVEL

PHONES POWER

ON OFF

STEREO THX

RT/PTY/TP

MEMORY

LISTENING MODE

TUNING

MODE SETUP

PRESET

TUNING

TUNING RETURN

ENTER

SETUP MIC

VIDEO

S VIDEO DIGITAL

AUX 2 INPUT

AUDIOLR

CLEAR

STANDBY

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

RETURN

TUNING MODE

TUNING /

ENTER

MEMORY

DISPLAY

DISPLAY MUTING

DIMMER

CDR/MD

SAT

TAPE/AMP

SLEEP

REMOTE MODE

PLAYLIST

RANDOMREC

ENTER

VOL

DISC

ALBUM

VCR

CABLE DOCK

DVD

RECEIVER

123

ZONE

RETURN

CH +

–

DISPLAY

RECEIVER

ENTER

TUNING

MODE

ENTER

TUNING

RETURN

Remote

controller

AV controller

Press the [DISPLAY] button

repeatedly to cycle through the

available information.

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE

MODE button, followed by the

[SETUP] button.

The main menu appears onscreen.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “4. Source

Setup,” and then press [ENTER].

The Source Setup menu appears.

Note:

• If the Satellite Radio mode is set to

None (see page 63), the “4. Satellite

Radio” item is not available.

DISPLAY

Remote

controller

AV controller

Channel name

↓

Channel number & preset number

↓

Category → Artist → Song title → Listening mode

RECEIVER

ENTER

4.Source Setup

1.IntelliVolume

2.A/V Sync

3.Name Edit

4.Satellite Radio

5.SIRIUS Parental Lock

DVD

PR-SC885_En.book Page 65 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Listening to the Radio

—Continued

Notes:

• So long as the signal strength is good, you can enjoy

XM Radio by using either satellite or terrestrial recep-

tion.

•Terrestrial

signals are only available in certain areas.

• The XM information is only displayed when the Sat-

ellite Radio mode is set to XM or XM/SIRIUS (see

page 63).

• If you’re using both XM Satellite Radio and SIRIUS

Satellite Radio and the Satellite mode is set to

XM/SIRIUS (see page 63), signal strength meters for

both systems appear on the same screen.

XM Radio Messages

The following messages may appear while using XM

Satellite radio.

❑

CHECK ANTENNA

The XM antenna is not properly connected to the

Mini-Tuner Dock. Check the connection. Check the

antenna cable for damage.

❑

UPDATING

XM is updating your Mini-Tuner with the latest

encryption code. Wait a few seconds until the update

is done. Alternatively, you may be attempting to tune

to a channel that is blocked or that you cannot

receive with your subscription package. To receive

that channel, contact XM Satellite Radio.

❑

NO SIGNAL

The XM Mini-Tuner cannot receive the satellite sig-

nal. Check the XM antenna for obstructions to the

southern sky. Check the antenna positioning with the

Antenna Aiming function (see left column).

❑

The AV controller is tuning or decoding audio or text

data. Please wait. If this occurs often, check the XM

antenna position with the Antenna Aiming function

(see left column).

❑

OFF AIR

The XM channel you selected is not currently broad-

casting. Select another channel.

❑

UPGRADE XM TUNER

The connected XM CNP-1000 is incompatible. The

AV controller features advanced technology that is

designed for use with the XM Mini-Tuner. Contact

XM Listener Care and ask about upgrading your XM

CNP-1000 to an XM Mini-Tuner. Have the AV con-

troller’s model name and CNP-1000 XM ID number

ready beforehand, and explain that your AV control-

ler is displaying the message “Upgrade XM Tuner.”

If you already have an XM Mini-Tuner connected

and you see this message, turn off the AV controller,

make sure the XM Mini-Tuner is properly seated in

the Mini-Tuner Dock, and then turn the AV control-

ler back on again. If the message reappears, contact

XM Listener Care and explain the issue that you’re

experiencing and the corrective actions you’ve tried.

❑

CHECK XM TUNER

The AV controller is having difﬁculty communicat-

ing with the XM Mini-Tuner module. Make sure the

XM Mini-Tuner is properly seated in the Mini-Tuner

Dock. And make sure the Mini-Tuner Dock cable is

properly connected to the AV controller and is not

damaged. If the issue persists, contact XM Listener

Care. Have the AV controller’s model name ready

beforehand, and explain the issue that you’re experi-

encing and the corrective actions you’ve tried.

❑

Unavailable Channel

You may be attempting to select a channel that is

unavailable or has changed to a different channel

number. Check xmradio.com for the latest channel

listing.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “4. Satellite

Radio,” and then press [ENTER].

The Satellite Radio screen appears.

The name of the currently selected

input selector is displayed in a box.

Position the XM Mini-Tuner

Antenna so that as many bars as

possible (up to 3) appear on the

XM Satellite signal strength

meter.

The best signal is achieved when the

antenna is pointing to the southern sky

through an unobstructed window.

If you cannot receive a satellite signal,

position the XM Mini-Tuner System so

that as many bars as possible (up to 3)

appear on the XM Terrestrial signal

strength meter.

ENTER

4-4.SAT Radio

XM Antenna Aiming

Satellite Terrestrial

PR-SC885_En.book Page 66 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Listening to the Radio

—Continued

Note:

Hardware and required basic monthly subscription sold

separately. Installation costs and other fees and taxes,

including a one-time activation fee may apply. Subscrip-

tion fee is consumer only. All fees and programming

subject to change.

What is SIRIUS Satellite Radio?

Simply The Best Radio on Radio

with all your favor-

ite entertainment including 100% commercial-free

music, plus superior sports coverage, uncensored talk

and comedy, world-class entertainment, news, weather

and more for your car, home or ofﬁce. For more informa-

tion visit sirius.com or siriuscanada.ca

A warning against reverse engineering:

It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse

engineer, or manipulate any technology incorporated in

receivers compatible with the SIRIUS Satellite Radio

system.

Setting Up the SiriusConnect™ Home

Tuner

The optional SiriusConnect Home tuner kit includes

everything for easy home installation, including the Sir-

iusConnect receiver, indoor/outdoor antenna with 21-

foot cable, 8-pin mini DIN connector cable, and an AC

power adapter. See the SiriusConnect Home tuner’s

instructions for more information.

Use the 8-pin mini DIN connector cable to connect the

SiriusConnect receiver to the SIRIUS jack on the rear of

the AV controller.

To use the included antenna indoors, you must place it at

a north-, west-, or east-facing window, depending on

where you live. If this isn’t possible, you’ll need to

install it outside, away from any overhead obstructions.

Positioning the Antenna

For a consistent satellite signal, the antenna must be

positioned correctly. Use the following map to determine

which area you are in and position the antenna accord-

ingly.

Area 1:

Point the antenna toward the sky in the

east

northeast

, or

southeast

, either through a window or out-

side.

Area 2:

Point the antenna toward the sky in the

north

northeast

, either through a window or outside.

Area 3:

Point the antenna toward the sky in the

north

northwest

, either through a window or outside.

Area 4:

Point the antenna toward the sky in the

west

northwest

, or

southwest

, either through a window or

outside.

Area 5:

Put the antenna outside and point it

straight up

The antenna cannot be used indoors.

Listening to SIRIUS Satellite Radio

“SIRIUS” and the SIRIUS dog

logo are registered trademarks of

SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc.

Important SIRIUS Satellite Radio Information

SIRIUS is available in the US for subscribers with

addresses in the continental US and is available in

Canada for subscribers with a Canadian address. To

Get SIRIUS Satellite Radio a subscription and

compatible tuner and antenna are required and sold

separately. Visit sirius.com for the most complete

and up-to-date channel lineup and information.

“SIRIUS” and the SIRIUS dog logo and related

marks are trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc.

SIRIUS

SiriusConnect

receiver

8-pin mini DIN

connector cable

AC power

Indoor/outdoor antenna

with 21-foot cable

AV controller

SIRIUS

jack

HORIZON

SKY

SOUTH

WEST EAST

NORTH

PR-SC885_En.book Page 67 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Listening to the Radio

—Continued

Setting the Satellite Radio Mode

Before you can listen to SIRIUS Satellite Radio, you

must set the Satellite Radio mode to SIRIUS.

Selecting SIRIUS Satellite Radio

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE

MODE button, followed by the

[SETUP] button.

The main menu appears onscreen.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “7. Hardware

Setup,” and then press [ENTER].

The Hardware Setup menu appears.

INPUT SELECTOR

ON STANDBY

DISPLAY MUTING

DIMMER

CDR/MD

SAT

TAPE/AMP

SLEEP

MACRO

REMOTE MODE

---

10 11 12

TV CH

TV VOL

PLAYLIST

RANDOM

DVD

AUX1AUX

GAME/TV

CBL/SATVCR/DVR

D. TUN

TUNER

TAPE

PHONO

REC

ENTER

VOL

DISC

ALBUM

VCR

CABLE DOCK

DVD

RECEIVER

123

ZONE

INPUT

+10 0

CLEAR

123

456

789

RECEIVER

SETUP

ENTER

TUNER

STANDBY/ON

MASTER VOLUME

CDTUNER

TAPECBL/SAT GAME/TV AUX 1 AUX 2VCR/DVR

DVDAUDIO SELPURE AUDIO PHONO DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

OFF TONE HDMI OUT

DIGITAL INPUT

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

LEVEL

PHONES POWER

ON OFF

STEREO THX

RT/PTY/TP

MEMORY

LISTENING MODE

TUNING

MODE SETUP

PRESET

TUNING

TUNING RETURN

ENTER

SETUP MIC

VIDEO

S VIDEO DIGITAL

AUX 2 INPUT

AUDIOLR

CLEAR

STANDBY

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

TUNER

SETUP

ENTER

TUNING /

RECEIVER

ENTER

7.Hardware Setup

1.Remote Control

2.Zone2/Zone3

3.Tuner

4.Analog Multich

5.HDMI

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “3. Tuner,” and

then press [ENTER].

The Tuner screen appears.

Use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “SIRIUS.”

If there are 2 items on the Tuner

screen, use Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “Satellite

Radio.”

Pressing the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]

buttons cycles through the following

options: None

→

SIRIUS

→

SIRIUS

None

: Select if you’re not using

satellite radio.

: Select to use XM Satellite

Radio.

SIRIUS

:Select to use SIRIUS Satel-

lite Radio.

XM/SIRIUS

:Select to use XM Satel-

lite Radio and SIRIUS Sat-

ellite Radio.

When you’ve ﬁnished, press the

[SETUP] button.

Setup closes.

On the AV controller, press the

[TUNER] input selector button

repeatedly to select SIRIUS.

On the remote controller, press

the [RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE

button, and then press the

[TUNER] INPUT SELECTOR but-

ton repeatedly to select SIRIUS.

If “CHECK SR TUNER” appears on

the display, make sure the SiriusCon-

nect receiver is connected properly. If

“ANTENNA ERROR” appears, make

sure the antenna is connected properly.

ENTER

7-3.Tuner

Satellite Radio None

ENTER

TUNER

Remote

controller

AV controller

RECEIVER

PR-SC885_En.book Page 68 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Listening to the Radio

—Continued

Signing Up for SIRIUS Satellite Radio

Before you can use SIRIUS Satellite Radio, you must

ﬁrst sign up for an account. You’ll need a major credit

card and your

SIRIUS Satellite Radio ID,

which you can

get from the AV controller, as explained below, or from

the SiriusConnect Home tuner package.

Note:

•Your ID is also displayed on the Satellite Radio

screen. See “Positioning the SiriusConnect Home

Antenna” on page 73.

Selecting SIRIUS Satellite

Radio Channels

There are three ways to select SIRIUS Satellite Radio

channels:

Channel Search mode:

select any channel.

Category Search mode:

select channels by cate-

gory.

Direct tuning:

enter channel number.

■

Channel Search Mode

■

Category Search Mode

■

Direct Tuning

You can select a SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel directly

by entering its number.

Use the TUNING Up and Down

[ ]/[ ] buttons to select

channel 0.

Your SIRIUS Satellite Radio ID num-

ber is displayed. Write it below.

To sign up, go to:

http://activate.siriusradio.com

Or call: 1-888-539-SIRIUS (7474)

TUNING

INPUT SELECTOR

ON STANDBY

DISPLAY MUTING

DIMMER

CDR/MD

SAT

TAPE/AMP

SLEEP

MACRO

REMOTE MODE

---

10 11 12

TV CH

TV VOL

PLAYLIST

RANDOM

DVD

AUX1AUX

GAME/TV

CBL/SATVCR/DVR

D. TUN

TUNER

TAPE

PHONO

REC

ENTER

VOL

DISC

ALBUM

VCR

CABLE DOCK

DVD

RECEIVER

123

ZONE

INPUT

+10 0

CLEAR

123

456

789

RECEIVER

D.TUN

ENTER

Number

buttons

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE

MODE button, and then press the

[ENTER] button repeatedly to

select Channel Search mode.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select a channel.

You can also use the Left and Right

[ ]/[ ] buttons to select a category.

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE

MODE button, and then press the

[ENTER] button repeatedly to

select Category Search mode.

Use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select a category, and

use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select a channel in

that category.

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE

MODE button, followed by the

[D.TUN] button.

The [RECEIVER] button ﬂashes.

ENTER

RECEIVER

ENTER

Channel name

Channel number

ENTER

RECEIVER

ENTER

RECEIVER

D. TUN

CLEAR

PR-SC885_En.book Page 69 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Listening to the Radio

—Continued

Notes:

• If you select an unavailable channel, “INVALID

CHANNEL” appears on the display.

•If you select a channel that you are not subscribed to,

“CALL SIRIUS” appears on the display.

•Channels that are locked must be unlocked before you

can listen to them. See “Parental Lock” on right col-

umn for more information.

Selecting Channels on the AV controller:

Selecting the Previous Channel:

Parental Lock

With SIRIUS Parental Lock, you can lock out channels

that you do not want to receive and use a 4-digit PIN

number to prevent others from unlocking them.

Within 8 seconds, use the num-

ber buttons to enter the channel

number.

For example, to select channel #20,

press 0, 2, 0, or 2, 0, [ENTER].

Note:

While the [RECEIVER] button is ﬂash-

ing, you cannot select another input

source with the remote controller.

Press the [TUNING MODE] button

repeatedly to select Channel

Search mode or Category Search

mode.

Press [ENTER] repeatedly to

select a category.

Use the Tuning Up and Down

[]/[ ] buttons to select a chan-

nel.

In Channel Search mode, you can

select any channel.

In Category Search mode, you can only

select channels from the currently

selected category.

To listen to the previously

selected SIRIUS Satellite Radio

channel, press the [RETURN]

button.

DVD

AUX1AUX

GAME/TV

CBL/SATVCR/DVR

TUNER

TAPE

123

456

789

11 12

D. TUN

CLEAR

TUNING

MODE

ENTER

TUNING

RETURN

Remote

controller

AV controller

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE

MODE button, followed by the

[SETUP] button.

The main menu appears onscreen.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “4. Source

Setup,” and then press [ENTER].

The Source Setup menu appears.

Note:

If the Satellite Radio mode is set to

None or XM (see page 68), the “5. SIR-

IUS Parental Lock” item is not avail-

able.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “5. SIRIUS

Parental Lock,” and then press

[ENTER].

The SIRIUS Parental Lock screen

appears.

RECEIVER

ENTER

4.Source Setup

1.IntelliVolume

2.A/V Sync

3.Name Edit

4.Satellite Radio

5.SIRIUS Parental Lock

DVD

ENTER

ENTER 4-5.SIRIUS Parental Lock

Enter Code

0123456 789

PR-SC885_En.book Page 70 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Listening to the Radio

—Continued

Notes:

• While a channel is locked, it cannot be selected for

listening.

•To unlock a channel, you must enter the correct PIN

number and change it to Unlocked in step 6.

Changing the PIN Number

Press the [D.TUN] button, and

then use the number buttons to

enter the 4-digit PIN number.

Use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select a number on the

screen, and then press [ENTER].

Repeat this for each of the four

digits in the PIN number.

If you’re entering the PIN number for

the very ﬁrst time, the PIN is stored,

and the following screen appears.

If you’ve already set a PIN number, you

must enter the correct PIN to get to this

screen. If you enter the wrong PIN, the

message “Wrong Code!” appears and

you’ll have to enter the PIN again.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “Parental Lock,”

and then press [ENTER].

The Parental Lock screen appears.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select a channel, and

use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select Locked or

Unlocked.

The number, name, and status of the

currently selected channel is displayed.

DVD

AUX1AUX

GAME/TV

CBL/SATVCR/DVR

TUNER

TAPE

123

456

789

11 12

D. TUN

CLEAR

ENTER

D. TUN

CLEAR

4-5.SIRIUS Parental Lock

Edit Code

Parental Lock

ENTER

4-5.SIRIUS Parental Lock

Parental Lock

Channel Status

0ch wwwwwwwww Locked

:CHANNEL

:STATUS

:SAVE

:RETURN

ENT

RET

ENTER

When you’ve ﬁnished, press

[ENTER] to save your changes,

or press [RETURN] to return to

the previous screen without sav-

ing.

When [ENTER] is pressed, the conﬁr-

mation message “Locked” or

“Unlocked” appears.

Press the [SETUP] button.

Setup closes.

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE

MODE button, followed by the

[SETUP] button.

The main menu appears onscreen.

ENTER

INPUT SELECTOR

ON STANDBY

DISPLAY MUTING

DIMMER

CDR/MD

SAT

TAPE/AMP

SLEEP

MACRO

REMOTE MODE

---

10 11 12

TV CH

TV VOL

DVD

AUX1AUX

GAME/TV

CBL/SATVCR/DVR

D. TUN

TUNER

TAPE

PHONO

ENTER

VOL

DISC

ALBUM

VCR

CABLE DOCK

DVD

RECEIVER

123

ZONE

INPUT

+10 0

CLEAR

123

456

789

RECEIVER

D.TUN

ENTER

Number

buttons

RECEIVER

PR-SC885_En.book Page 71 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Listening to the Radio

—Continued

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “4. Source

Setup,” and then press [ENTER].

The Source Setup menu appears.

Note:

If the Satellite Radio mode is set to

None or XM (see page 68), the “5. SIR-

IUS Parental Lock” item is not avail-

able.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “5. SIRIUS

Parental Lock,” and then press

[ENTER].

The SIRIUS Parental Lock screen

appears.

Press the [D.TUN] button, and

then use the number buttons to

enter the old 4-digit PIN number.

Use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select a number on the

screen, and then press [ENTER].

Repeat this for each of the four

digits in the old PIN number.

If you enter the correct PIN number, the

following screen appears.

If you enter the wrong PIN number, the

message “Wrong Code!” appears and

you’ll have to enter the PIN again.

ENTER

4.Source Setup

1.IntelliVolume

2.A/V Sync

3.Name Edit

4.Satellite Radio

5.SIRIUS Parental Lock

DVD

ENTER

ENTER 4-5.SIRIUS Parental Lock

Enter Code

0123456 789

DVD

AUX1AUX

GAME/TV

CBL/SATVCR/DVR

TUNER

TAPE

123

456

789

11 12

D. TUN

CLEAR

ENTER

D. TUN

CLEAR

or 4-5.SIRIUS Parental Lock

Edit Code

Parental Lock

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “Edit Code,”

and then press [ENTER].

The New Code screen appears.

Press the [D.TUN] button, and

then use the number buttons to

enter the new 4-digit PIN number.

Use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select a number on the

screen, and then press [ENTER].

Repeat this for each of the four

digits in the new PIN number.

The Conﬁrm screen appears.

Conﬁrm the new PIN number by

entering it again.

If you conﬁrm the PIN number cor-

rectly, the new PIN is saved and the

message “Complete” appears.

If you conﬁrm the PIN number incor-

rectly, “Wrong Code!” appears, and

you’ll be returned to step 5 to try again.

Press the [SETUP] button.

Setup closes.

ENTER

4-5.SIRIUS Parental Lock

New Code

0123456 789

DVD

AUX1AUX

GAME/TV

CBL/SATVCR/DVR

TUNER

TAPE

123

456

789

11 12

D. TUN

CLEAR

D. TUN

CLEAR

ENTER

4-5.SIRIUS Parental Lock

Comfirm

0123456 789

PR-SC885_En.book Page 72 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Listening to the Radio

—Continued

Displaying SIRIUS Satellite Radio

Information

The following information can be displayed:

Note:

• If the category, artist/composer, or song title is not

available, “- - -” will be displayed instead.

Positioning the SiriusConnect Home

Antenna

You can check the strength of the SIRIUS Satellite Radio

signal and adjust the position of the SiriusConnect Home

antenna accordingly.

Press the [DISPLAY] button

repeatedly to cycle through the

available information.

INPUT SELECTOR

LISTENING MODE

ON STANDBY

DISPLAY MUTING

DIMMER

CDR/MD

SAT

TAPE/AMP

SLEEP

MACRO

REMOTE MODE

---

10 11 12

TV CH

TV VOL

PLAYLIST

RANDOM

DVD

AUX1AUX

GAME/TV

CBL/SATVCR/DVR

D. TUN

TUNER

TAPE

PHONO

REC

ENTER

SURR

STEREO

VOL

DISC

ALBUM

VCR

CABLE DOCK

DVD

RECEIVER

123

ZONE

INPUT

+10 0

CLEAR

123

456

789

DISPLAY

RECEIVER

ENTER

STANDBY/ON

MASTER VOLUME

CDTUNER

TAPECBL/SAT GAME/TV AUX 1 AUX 2VCR/DVR

DVDAUDIO SELPURE AUDIO PHONO DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

OFF TONE HDMI OUT

DIGITAL INPUT

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

LEVEL

PHONES POWER

ON OFF

STEREO THX

RT/PTY/TP

MEMORY

LISTENING MODE

TUNING

MODE SETUP

PRESET

TUNING

TUNING RETURN

ENTER

SETUP MIC

VIDEO

S VIDEO DIGITAL

AUX 2 INPUT

AUDIOLR

CLEAR

STANDBY

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

TUNER

SETUP

ENTER

TUNING /

DISPLAY

Remote

controller

AV controller

Channel name

↓

Channel number & preset number

↓

Category

↓

Artist/composer

↓

Song title

↓

Listening mode

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE

MODE button, followed by the

[TUNER] button, and [SETUP]

button.

The main menu appears onscreen.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “4. Source

Setup,” and then press [ENTER].

The Source Setup menu appears.

Note:

If the Satellite Radio mode is set to

None (see page 68), the “4. Satellite

Radio” item is not available.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “4. Satellite

Radio,” and then press [ENTER].

The Satellite Radio screen appears.

The name of the currently selected

input selector is displayed in a box.

RECEIVER

ENTER

4.Source Setup

1.IntelliVolume

2.A/V Sync

3.Name Edit

4.Satellite Radio

5.SIRIUS Parental Lock

DVD

ENTER

PR-SC885_En.book Page 73 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Listening to the Radio

—Continued

Notes:

• So long as the signal strength is good, you can enjoy

SIRIUS Satellite Radio by using either satellite or ter-

restrial reception.

•Terrestrial

signals are only available in certain areas.

•The SIRIUS information on the Satellite Radio screen

is only displayed when the Satellite Radio mode is set

to SIRIUS or XM/SIRIUS (see page 68).

• If you’re using both XM Satellite Radio and SIRIUS

Satellite Radio and the Satellite mode is set to

XM/SIRIUS (see page 68), signal strength meters for

both systems appear on the same screen.

SIRIUS Satellite Radio Messages

The following messages may appear while using

SIRIUS Satellite Radio.

❑

ACQUIRING

The SiriusConnect receiver is acquiring the signal or

no signal is present. Make sure the SiriusConnect

Home tuner is connected properly and that there are

no obstacles close by.

❑

ANTENNA ERROR

Make sure the SiriusConnect Home tuner is con-

nected properly.

❑

SUB UPDATED

Displayed while your subscription is being updated.

No operations can be performed until this message

has cleared.

❑

UPDATING XXX%

Displayed while the channel map is being updated.

Wait until the updating is complete.

❑

UPDATING

Displayed while the SiriusConnect receiver’s ﬁrm-

ware is being updated.

❑

INVALID CHANNEL

Displayed if you select an unavailable channel.

❑

CALL SIRIUS

Displayed when you select a channel to which you

are not subscribed. Call SIRIUS if you want to sub-

scribe.

❑

CHECK SR TUNER

Displayed if the SiriusConnect receiver is not con-

nected. Make sure the SiriusConnect receiver is con-

nected properly, and make sure its AC adapter is

plugged in.

Position the SiriusConnect Home

antenna so that as many bars as

possible (up to 3) appear on the

SIRIUS Satellite signal strength

meter.

If you cannot receive a satellite signal,

position the SiriusConnect Home

antenna so that as many bars as possible

(up to 3) appear on the SIRIUS Terres-

trial signal strength meter.

4-4.SAT Radio

SIRIUS Antenna Aiming

Satellite Terrestrial

SIRIUS ID 000000000000

PR-SC885_En.book Page 74 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Listening to the Radio

—Continued

You can store a combination of up to 40 of your favorite

AM, FM, XM, and SIRIUS radio stations.

Note:

•You can name your radio presets for easy identiﬁca-

tion (see page 102).

Selecting Presets

Deleting Presets

Presetting AM, FM, XM, and SIRIUS

Stations

Tune into the AM, FM, XM, or SIR-

IUS station you want to store as a

preset.

Press the [MEMORY] button.

The preset number ﬂashes.

While the preset number is ﬂash-

ing (about 8 seconds), use the

PRESET [ ]/[ ] buttons to

select a preset from 1 through 40.

Press the [MEMORY] button

again to store the station.

The station is stored and the preset

number stops ﬂashing.

Repeat this procedure for all of your

favorite stations.

STANDBY/ON

MASTER VOLUME

CDTUNER

TAPECBL/SAT GAME/TV AUX 1 AUX 2VCR/DVR

DVDAUDIO SELPURE AUDIO PHONO DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

OFF TONE HDMI OUT

DIGITAL INPUT

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

LEVEL

PHONES POWER

ON OFF

STEREO THX

RT/PTY/TP

MEMORY

LISTENING MODE

TUNING

MODE SETUP

PRESET

TUNING

TUNING RETURN

ENTER

SETUP MIC

VIDEO

S VIDEO DIGITAL

AUX 2 INPUT

AUDIOLR

CLEAR

STANDBY

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

2, 4 3

MEMORY

PRESET

MEMORY

To select a preset, use the PRE-

SET [ ]/[ ] buttons or the

remote controller’s CH [+/–] but-

ton.

Select the preset that you want to

delete.

See the previous section.

While holding down the [MEM-

ORY] button, press the

[TUNING MODE] button.

The preset is deleted and its number

disappears from the display.

INPUT SELECTOR

ON STANDBY

DISPLAY MUTING

DIMMER

CDR/MD

SAT

TAPE/AMP

SLEEP

MACRO

REMOTE MODE

---

10 11 12

TV CH

TV VOL

DVD

AUX1AUX

GAME/TV

CBL/SATVCR/DVR

D. TUN

TUNER

TAPE

PHONO

ENTER

VOL

DISC

ALBUM

VCR

CABLE DOCK

DVD

RECEIVER

123

ZONE

INPUT

+10 0

CLEAR

123

456

789

CH +/–

STANDBY/ON

MASTER VOLUME

CDTUNER

TAPECBL/SAT GAME/TV AUX 1 AUX 2VCR/DVR

DVDAUDIO SELPURE AUDIO PHONO DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

OFF TONE HDMI OUT

DIGITAL INPUT

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

LEVEL

PHONES POWER

ON OFF

STEREO THX

RT/PTY/TP

MEMORY

LISTENING MODE

TUNING

MODE SETUP

PRESET

TUNING

TUNING RETURN

ENTER

SETUP MIC

VIDEO

S VIDEO DIGITAL

AUX 2 INPUT

AUDIOLR

CLEAR

STANDBY

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

PRESET

DISC

ALBUM

PRESET

STANDBY/ON

MASTER VOLUME

CDTUNER

TAPECBL/SAT GAME/TV AUX 1 AUX 2VCR/DVR

DVDAUDIO SELPURE AUDIO PHONO DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

OFF TONE HDMI OUT

DIGITAL INPUT

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

LEVEL

PHONES POWER

ON OFF

STEREO THX

RT/PTY/TP

MEMORY

LISTENING MODE

TUNING

MODE SETUP

PRESET

TUNING

TUNING RETURN

ENTER

SETUP MIC

VIDEO

S VIDEO DIGITAL

AUX 2 INPUT

AUDIOLR

CLEAR

STANDBY

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

MEMORY

TUNING

MODE

CLEAR

PR-SC885_En.book Page 75 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Common Functions

This section explains functions that can be used with any

input source.

You can adjust the brightness of the display.

You can adjust the volume of each speaker while listen-

ing to an input source. These temporary adjustments are

cancelled when the AV controller is set to Standby.

Notes:

•You cannot use this function while the AV controller

is muted.

• Speakers that are set to No or None in the Speaker

Conﬁguration cannot be adjusted (see page 94).

■

Headphones

While a pair of headphones is connected, you can use the

[CH SEL], [LEVEL–], and [LEVEL+] buttons to adjust

the volume of each headphone speaker (left and right),

from –12 dB to +12 dB each.

These settings are stored when the AV controller is set to

Standby.

You can temporarily mute the output of the AV control-

ler.

To unmute the AV controller,

press the remote control-

ler’s [MUTING] button again, or adjust the volume. The

output is unmuted and the MUTING indicator goes off.

Muting is cancelled when the AV controller is set to

Standby.

Tip:

You can specify how much the output is muted with the

Muting Level setting (see page 104).

Setting the Display Brightness

Press the remote controller’s

[DIMMER] button repeatedly to

select:

• Normal + VOLUME light on.

• Normal + VOLUME light off.

• Dim + VOLUME light off.

• Dimmer + VOLUME light off.

You can also use the AV controller’s

[DIMMER] button.

INPUT SELECTOR

LISTENING MODE

DISPLAY MUTING

RC-

690

DIMMER

CDR/MD

SAT

TAPE/AMP

SLEEP

MACRO

REMOTE MODE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

REPEAT

PLAY MODE

---

10 11 12

VIDEO OFFOPEN/CLOSE

TV CH

TV VOL

PLAYLIST

RANDOM

AUX1AUX

GAME/TV

D. TUN

TUNER

TAPE

PHONO

VCRVCR DVDDVD HDDHDD

REC

ENTER

TEST TONE

AUDIO SEL

CH SEL

SURR

DIRECT

THX

PURE A

STEREO

LEVEL

L NIGHT

ALL ST

VOL

DISC

ALBUM

VCR

CABLE DOCK

DVD

RECEIVER

123

ZONE

+10 0

CLEAR

456

789

Re-EQ

MUTING

CH SEL LEVEL – +

SLEEP

DIMMER

DISPLAY

STANDBY/ON

MASTER VOLUME

CDTUNER

TAPECBL/SAT GAME/TV AUX 1 AUX 2VCR/DVR

DVDAUDIO SELPURE AUDIO PHONO DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

STANDBY

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

OFF TONE HDMI OUT

DIGITAL INPUT

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

LEVEL

PHONES

STEREO THX

DIMMER

MEMORY

LISTENING MODE

TUNING

MODE SETUP

PRESET

TUNING

TUNING RETURN

ENTER

SETUP MIC

VIDEO

S VIDEO DIGITAL

AUX 2 INPUT

AUDIOLR

CLEAR

PHONES DIMMER DISPLAY

Press

[RECEIVER]

ﬁrst

DIMMER

AV controller

Remote

controller

Adjusting Speaker Levels

Use the remote controller’s

[CH SEL] button to select each

speaker, and use the [LEVEL–]

and [LEVEL+] buttons to adjust

the volume.

You can adjust the volume of each

speaker from –12 dB to +12 dB

(–15 dB to +12 dB for the subwoofer).

Muting the AV Controller

Press the remote controller’s

[MUTING] button.

The output is muted and the MUTING

indicator ﬂashes on the display.

CH SEL

LEVEL LEVEL

MUTING

PR-SC885_En.book Page 76 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Common Functions

—Continued

With the sleep timer, you can set the AV controller so

that it turns off automatically after a speciﬁed period.

To cancel the sleep timer,

press the [SLEEP] button

repeatedly until the SLEEP indicator disappears.

To check the remaining sleep time,

press the [SLEEP]

button. Note that if you press the [SLEEP] button while

the sleep time is being displayed, you’ll shorten the sleep

time by 10 minutes.

For private listening, you can connect a pair of stereo

headphones (1/4-inch phone plug) to the AV controller’s

PHONES jack.

Notes:

•Always turn down the volume before connecting your

headphones.

•While the headphones plug is inserted in the PHONES

jack, the speakers are turned off and the Headphone

indicator lights up.

•When you connect a pair of headphones, the listening

mode is set to Stereo, unless it was already set to Pure

Audio, Mono, Stereo, or Direct, in which case it stays

the same.

You can display various information about the current

input source as follows.

The following information can typically be displayed:

*If the input signal is analog, no format information is

displayed. If the input signal is PCM, the sampling

frequency is displayed. If the input signal is digital but

not PCM, the signal format and the number of chan-

nels is displayed. For some digital input signals,

including multichannel PCM, the signal format, num-

ber of channels, and sampling frequency is displayed.

Information is displayed for about 3 seconds, then the

previous display reappears.

Using the Sleep Timer

Press the remote controller’s

[SLEEP] button repeatedly to

select the required sleep time.

You can set the sleep time from 90 to 10

minutes in 10 minute steps.

The SLEEP indicator appears on the

display when the sleep timer has been

set, as shown. The speciﬁed sleep time

appears on the display for about 5 sec-

onds, then the previous display reap-

pears.

Using Headphones

SLEEP

SLEEP indicator

Displaying Source Information

Press the [DISPLAY] button

repeatedly to cycle through the

available information.

DISPLAY

Remote

controller

AV controller

Input source

Listening

mode

Signal format*

Sampling

frequency

PR-SC885_En.book Page 77 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Common Functions

—Continued

If you connect a component to more than one audio

input, such as a DVD player connected to analog, digital,

multichannel, and HDMI inputs, you can use the

[AUDIO SEL] button to select which audio input you

want to use to listen to that component.

Normally, the AV controller detects the format of digital

input signals automatically. However, if you experience

either of the following issues when playing PCM or DTS

sources, you can specify the signal format manually.

•If the beginnings of tracks from a PCM source are cut

off, try the PCM setting.

• If noise is produced when fast forwarding or rewind-

ing a DTS CD, try the DTS setting.

Selecting Audio Inputs

Press the [AUDIO SEL] button

repeatedly to select an audio

input: HDMI > Auto > Multich >

Analog.

HDMI:

Selects the assigned HDMI

IN, and the HDMI indicator

appears on the display. (The

HDMI IN must already be

assigned to the current input

selector. See page 47.)

Auto:

Selects the assigned COAX-

IAL or OPTICAL DIGITAL

IN, and the DIGITAL indica-

tor appears on the display.

(The DIGITAL IN must

already be assigned to the

current input selector. See

page 49.) If there is no digital

signal, the analog input is

used instead.

Multich:

Selects the multichannel

input, and the ANALOG indi-

cator appears on the display.

(The multichannel input must

already be assigned to the

current input selector. See

page 51.)

Analog:

Selects the analog input, and

the ANALOG indicator

appears on the display.

You can also use the [AUDIO SEL]

button on the AV controller.

LISTENING MODE

RC-

690

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

REPEAT

PLAY MODE

VIDEO OFFOPEN/CLOSE

PLAYLIST

RANDOM

VCRVCR DVDDVD HDDHDD

REC

TEST TONE

AUDIO SEL

CH SEL

SURR

DIRECT

THX

PURE A

STEREO

LEVEL

L NIGHT

ALL ST

Re-EQ

AUDIO SEL

Specifying the Digital Signal Format

Press the [AUDIO SEL] button

repeatedly to select Auto.

While “Auto” is shown on the dis-

play, use the Up [ ] and Down

[] buttons to select:

PCM:

Only input signals in PCM

format are output, and the

PCM indicator lights up. The

indicator ﬂashes if the input

signal is not PCM.

DTS:

Only input signals in DTS

format are output, and the

DTS indicator lights up. The

indicator ﬂashes if the input

signal is not DTS.

Auto (default):

The format is detected

automatically. If no digital

input signal is present, the

analog input is used instead.

STANDBY/ON

MASTER VOLUME

CDTUNER

TAPECBL/SAT GAME/TV AUX 1 AUX 2VCR/DVR

DVDAUDIO SELPURE AUDIO PHONO DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

OFF TONE HDMI OUT

DIGITAL INPUT

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

LEVEL

PHONES POWER

ON OFF

STEREO THX

RT/PTY/TP

MEMORY

LISTENING MODE

TUNING

MODE SETUP

PRESET

TUNING

TUNING RETURN

ENTER

SETUP MIC

VIDEO

S VIDEO DIGITAL

AUX 2 INPUT

AUDIOLR

CLEAR

STANDBY

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

AUDIO SEL

PR-SC885_En.book Page 78 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Using the Listening Modes

For a description of each listening mode, see “About the

Listening Modes” on page 84.

Selecting on the AV Controller

■

[PURE AUDIO] button

This button selects the Pure Audio listening mode.

When this mode is selected, the AV controller’s dis-

play is turned off and only the HDMI outputs output

video signals. Pressing this button again will select

the previous listening mode.

■

[STEREO] button

This button selects the Stereo listening mode.

■

[THX] button

This button selects the THX listening modes.

■

LISTENING MODE [ ]/[ ] buttons

Pressing these buttons repeatedly cycles through all

of the listening modes that can be used with the cur-

rent input source.

Selecting with the Remote Controller

■

[STEREO] button

This button selects the Stereo listening mode.

■

[SURR] button

This button selects the Dolby Digital and DTS listen-

ing modes.

■

LISTENING MODE [ ]/[ ] buttons

Pressing these buttons repeatedly cycles through all

of the listening modes that can be used with the cur-

rent input source.

■

[PURE A] button

This button selects the Pure Audio listening mode.

When this mode is selected, the AV controller’s dis-

play is turned off and only the HDMI outputs output

video signals.

■

[DIRECT] button

This button selects the Direct listening mode.

■

[THX] button

This button selects the THX listening modes.

■

[ALL ST] button

This button selects the All Channel Stereo listening

mode.

Selecting the Listening Modes

• The Dolby Digital and DTS listening modes

can only be selected if your DVD player is

connected to the AV controller with a digital

audio connection (coaxial, optical, or HDMI).

•The listening modes you can select depends

on the format of the input signal. To check

the format, see “Displaying Source Informa-

tion” on page 77.

• While a pair of headphones is connected,

you can only select the Pure Audio, Mono,

Direct, or Stereo listening mode.

STANDBY/ON

MASTER VOLUME

CDTUNER

TAPECBL/SAT GAME/TV AUX 1 AUX 2VCR/DVR

DVDAUDIO SELPURE AUDIO PHONO DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

OFF TONE HDMI OUT

DIGITAL INPUT

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

LEVEL

PHONES POWER

ON OFF

STEREO THX

RT/PTY/TP

MEMORY

LISTENING MODE

TUNING

MODE SETUP

PRESET

TUNING

TUNING RETURN

ENTER

SETUP MIC

VIDEO

S VIDEO DIGITAL

AUX 2 INPUT

AUDIOLR

CLEAR

STANDBY

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

PURE AUDIO

STEREO

LISTENING MODE

THX

LISTENING MODE

DISPLAY MUTING

RC-

690

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

REPEAT

PLAY MODE

VIDEO OFFOPEN/CLOSE

PLAYLIST

RANDOM

VCRVCR DVDDVD HDDHDD

REC

ENTER

TEST TONE

AUDIO SEL

CH SEL

SURR

DIRECT

THX

PURE A

STEREO

LEVEL

L NIGHT

ALL ST

VOL

DISC

ALBUM

Re-EQ

STEREO

PURE A

DIRECT THX

ALL ST

SURR

PR-SC885_En.book Page 79 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Using the Listening Modes

—Continued

Analog and PCM Sources

Listening Modes Available for Each Source Format

Button

Source format

PCM Multi

channel

analog

Multichannel PCM

32–96

kHz

176.4/

192 kHz*

32–96 kHz 176.4/192 kHz

*1. DVD-Audio discs output multichannel 176.4/192 kHz PCM only via HDMI.

except */2 */2 2ch 1/0, 1+1 Multichannel 2ch

Media

Listening Mode CD, TV, radio, DVD DVD DVD

[PURE A] Pure Audio

✔✔✔ ✔✔✔✔ ✔ ✔

[DIRECT] Direct

✔✔✔ ✔✔✔✔ ✔ ✔

[STEREO] Stereo

✔✔ ✔✔✔✔✔✔

[SURR]

Multichannel

✔✔✔ ✔

Dolby D

Dolby D Plus

DTS, DTS 96/24

DTS-ES Discrete/Matrix

DTS-HD High Resolution

DTS-HD Master Audio

Dolby TrueHD

DSD

Dolby PLII Movie/

Dolby PLIIx Movie

*2. If there are no surround back speakers, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.

✔ ✔ ✔

Dolby PLII Music/

Dolby PLIIx Music*

✔✔ ✔

Dolby PLII Game/

Dolby PLIIx Game*

✔✔

Dolby Digital EX/Dolby EX

✔

Neo:6

✔

Neo:6 Cinema

✔✔

Neo:6 Music

✔✔

Neural THX 5.1

✔✔

Neural THX 7.1

✔✔ ✔

[THX]

THX Cinema

*3. Available only when using surround speakers.

✔✔

Dolby PLII/

Dolby PLIIx THX*

✔

✔✔

Neo:6 THX*

✔

✔✔

Dolby PLII THX Games

Mode

✔ ✔

Neo:6 THX Games Mode

✔ ✔

THX Surround EX

✔

THX Ultra2 Cinema

✔

THX Music Mode

✔

THX Games Mode

✔

LISTENING MODE

[ ]/[ ]

*4. For T-D, Mono Movie, Orchestra, Unplugged, Studio-Mix, and TV Logic, PCM of 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz, and 96 kHz are processed at 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,

and 88.2 kHz respectively.

Requires 6.1/7.1 speakers.

Requires 7.1 speakers.

Mono

✔✔✔✔✔

Onkyo

Original DSP

Mono Movie

Orchestra

Unplugged

Studio-Mix

TV Logic

All Ch Stereo

Full Mono

T- D

✔✔✔✔✔

PR-SC885_En.book Page 80 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Using the Listening Modes

—Continued

DSD, Dolby Digital, and Dolby Digital Plus Sources

Button

Source format

DSD

*1. In listening modes other than DSD Direct and Pure Audio, DSD sources are converted and handled as PCM.

Dolby D Dolby Digital Plus

Multichannel Multichannel

2ch 1/0, 1+1

Multichannel

2ch 1/0, 1+1

3/2 2ch except

*/2 */2 except

*/2 */2

Media

Listening Mode SACD DVD, DTV, etc. Blu-ray, HD DVD

[PURE A] Pure Audio

✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔

[DIRECT] Direct

✔

*2. With the Delay Enable DSD setting on the Direct screen set to No (see page 91), if the source is DSD, the Direct listening mode becomes DSD Direct,

“DSD Direct” appears on the display, and the Speaker Configuration settings are ignored.

✔

✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔

[STEREO] Stereo

✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔

[SURR]

Multichannel

Dolby D

✔✔

Dolby D Plus

✔

*3. If there are no surround back speakers, depending on the input signal, Dolby Digital may be used.

✔

DTS, DTS 96/24

DTS-ES Discrete/Matrix

DTS-HD High Resolution

DTS-HD Master Audio

Dolby TrueHD

DSD

✔

Dolby PLII Movie/

Dolby PLIIx Movie

*4. If there are no surround back speakers, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

Dolby PLII Music/

Dolby PLIIx Music*

✔✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

Dolby PLII Game/

Dolby PLIIx Game*

✔✔ ✔

Dolby Digital EX/Dolby EX

✔✔ ✔

Neo:6

✔✔ ✔

Neo:6 Cinema

✔✔ ✔

Neo:6 Music

✔✔ ✔

Neural THX 5.1

✔✔ ✔

Neural THX 7.1

✔✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

[THX]

THX Cinema

*5. Available only when using surround speakers.

Requires 6.1/7.1 speakers.

Requires 7.1 speakers.

✔✔✔ ✔✔

Dolby PLII/

Dolby PLIIx THX

✔✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

Neo:6 THX

✔✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

Dolby PLII THX Games Mode

✔✔ ✔

Neo:6 THX Games Mode

✔✔ ✔

THX Surround EX

✔✔ ✔

THX Ultra2 Cinema

✔✔ ✔

THX Music Mode

✔✔ ✔

THX Games Mode

✔✔ ✔

LISTENING MODE

[ ]/[ ]

Mono

✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔

Onkyo

Original DSP

Mono Movie

Orchestra

Unplugged

Studio-Mix

TV Logic

All Ch Stereo

Full Mono

T- D

✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔

PR-SC885_En.book Page 81 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Using the Listening Modes

—Continued

TrueHD and DTS Sources

Button

Source format

TrueHD

*1. 192 kHz TrueHD sources are processed as 192 kHz 2-channel audio, regardless of the number of channels.

DTS, DTS96/24 DTS-ES

Discrete/

Matrix

Multichannel

2ch 1/0, 1+1

Multichannel

2ch 1/0

except

*/2 */2 except

*/2 */2

Media

Listening Mode Blu-ray, HD DVD DVD, CD, etc.

[PURE A] Pure Audio

✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔ ✔

[DIRECT] Direct

✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔ ✔

[STEREO] Stereo

✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔ ✔

[SURR]

Multichannel

Dolby D

Dolby D Plus

DTS, DTS 96/24

✔✔

DTS-ES Discrete/Matrix

✔

*2. If there are no surround back speakers, DTS is used.

DTS-HD High Resolution

DTS-HD Master Audio

TrueHD

✔✔

DSD

Dolby PLII Movie/

Dolby PLIIx Movie

*3. If there are no surround back speakers, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

Dolby PLII Music/

Dolby PLIIx Music*

✔✔ ✔ ✔

Dolby PLII Game/

Dolby PLIIx Game*

✔✔

Dolby Digital EX/Dolby EX

✔✔

Neo:6

✔✔

Neo:6 Cinema

✔✔

Neo:6 Music

✔✔

Neural THX 5.1

✔✔

Neural THX 7.1

✔✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

[THX]

THX Cinema

*4. Available only when using surround speakers.

✔✔ ✔✔ ✔

Dolby PLII/

Dolby PLIIx THX

✔✔ ✔ ✔

Neo:6 THX

✔✔ ✔ ✔

Dolby PLII THX Games Mode

✔✔

Neo:6 THX Games Mode

✔✔

THX Surround EX

✔✔

THX Ultra2 Cinema

✔✔ ✔

THX Music Mode

✔✔ ✔

THX Games Mode

✔✔ ✔

LISTENING MODE

[ ]/[ ]

*5. For T-D, Mono Movie, Orchestra, Unplugged, Studio-Mix, and TV Logic, DTS 96/24 is processed as DTS.

Requires 6.1/7.1 speakers.

Requires 7.1 speakers.

Mono

✔✔✔✔ ✔

Onkyo

Original DSP

Mono Movie

Orchestra

Unplugged

Studio-Mix

TV Logic

All Ch Stereo

Full Mono

T- D

✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔ ✔

PR-SC885_En.book Page 82 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Using the Listening Modes

—Continued

DTS-HD Sources

Button

Source format

DTS-HD High Resolution DTS-HD Master Audio

*1. 192 kHz DTS-HD Master Audio sources are processed at 96 kHz.

Multichannel 2ch 1/0 Multichannel 2ch 1/0

except */2 */2 except */2 */2

Media

Listening Mode Blu-ray, HD DVD Blu-ray, HD DVD

[PURE A] Pure Audio

✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔

[DIRECT] Direct

✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔

[STEREO] Stereo

✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔

[SURR]

Multichannel

Dolby D

Dolby D Plus

DTS, DTS 96/24

DTS-ES Discrete/Matrix

DTS-HD High Resolution

✔✔

DTS-HD Master Audio

✔✔

TrueHD

DSD

Dolby PLII Movie/

Dolby PLIIx Movie

*2. If there are no surround back speakers, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.

✔

*3. Depending on the source (e.g., 96 kHz sources), processing may be performed after DTS decoding.

✔

✔ ✔

Dolby PLII Music/

Dolby PLIIx Music*

✔

✔✔

Dolby PLII Game/

Dolby PLIIx Game*

✔

Dolby Digital EX/Dolby EX

✔

Neo:6

✔

Neo:6 Cinema

✔

Neo:6 Music

✔

Neural THX 5.1

✔✔

Neural THX 7.1

✔✔ ✔ ✔

[THX]

THX Cinema*

✔✔ ✔✔

Dolby PLII/

Dolby PLIIx THX

✔✔ ✔ ✔

Neo:6 THX

✔✔ ✔ ✔

Dolby PLII THX Games

Mode

✔✔

Neo:6 THX Games Mode

✔✔

THX Surround EX

✔✔

THX Ultra2 Cinema

✔✔

THX Music Mode

✔✔

THX Games Mode

✔✔

LISTENING MODE

[ ]/[ ]

Mono

✔

✔✔✔✔

Onkyo

Original DSP

Mono Movie

Orchestra

Unplugged

Studio-Mix

TV Logic

All Ch Stereo

Full Mono

T- D

*4. Available only when using surround speakers.

Requires 6.1/7.1 speakers.

Requires 7.1 speakers.

✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔

PR-SC885_En.book Page 83 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Using the Listening Modes

—Continued

The AV controller’s listening modes can transform your

listening room into a movie theater or concert hall, with

high ﬁdelity and stunning surround sound.

Pure Audio

In this mode, the display and video circuitry are turned

off, minimizing possible noise sources for the ultimate in

high-ﬁdelity audio reproduction. (As the video circuitry

is turned off, only the HDMI outputs output video.)

Note:

• The Pure Audio listening mode cannot be selected

while Zone 2 is on.

Direct

In this mode, audio from the input source is output

directly with minimal processing, providing high-ﬁdel-

ity reproduction. All of the source’s audio channels are

output as they are.

Stereo

Sound is output by the front left and right speakers.

Mono

Use this mode when watching an old movie with a mono

soundtrack, or use it with the foreign language

soundtracks recorded in the left and right channels of

some movies. It can also be used with DVDs or other

sources containing multiplexed audio, such as karaoke

DVDs.

Multichannel

This mode is for use with analog or PCM multichannel

sources.

Dolby Pro Logic IIx

This mode expands any 2-channel source for 7.1-chan-

nel playback. It provides a very natural and seamless sur-

round-sound experience that fully envelops the listener.

As well as music and movies, video games can also ben-

eﬁt from the dramatic spatial effects and vivid imaging.

If you’re not using any surround back speakers, Dolby

Pro Logic II will be used instead of Dolby Pro Logic IIx.

• Dolby PLIIx Movie

Use this mode with any stereo or Dolby Surround

(Pro Logic) movie (e.g., TV, DVD, VHS).

• Dolby PLIIx Music

Use this mode with any stereo or Dolby Surround

(Pro Logic) music source (e.g., CD, radio, cassette,

TV, VHS, DVD).

• Dolby PLIIx Game

Use this mode with video games, especially those

that bear the Dolby Pro Logic II logo.

Dolby Digital

Use this mode with DVDs that bear the Dolby Digital

logo and Dolby Digital TV broadcasts. This is the most

common digital surround-sound format, and it’ll put you

right in the middle of the action, just like being in a

movie theater or concert hall.

Dolby EX

This mode expands 5.1-channel sources for 6.1/7.1-

channel playback. It’s especially suited to Dolby Digital

EX soundtracks that include a matrix-encoded surround

back channel. The additional channel adds an extra

dimension and provides an enveloping surround sound

experience, perfect for rotating and ﬂy-by sound effects.

Dolby Digital Plus

Developed for use with HDTV, including the new video

disc formats Blu-ray and HD DVD, this is the latest mul-

tichannel audio format from Dolby. It supports up to 7.1

channels with 48 kHz/24-bit sampling rate and signal

resolution.

Dolby TrueHD

Designed to take full advantage of the additional storage

space offered by the new Blu-ray and HD DVD disc for-

mats, this new Dolby format offers up to 7.1 discrete

channels of lossless audio performance with 96 kHz/24-

bit sampling rate and signal resolution.

The AV controller supports 7.1-channel sources up to

96 kHz and 2-channel sources up to 192 kHz.

DTS NEO:6

This mode expands any 2-channel source for 7.1-chan-

nel playback. It uses seven full-bandwidth channels of

matrix decoding for matrix-encoded material, providing

a very natural and seamless surround sound experience

that fully envelops the listener.

• NEO:6 Cinema

Use this mode with any stereo movie (e.g., TV,

DVD, VHS).

• NEO:6 Music

Use this mode with any stereo music source (e.g.,

CD, radio, cassette, TV, VHS, DVD).

DTS

The DTS digital surround-sound format supports up to

5.1 discrete channels and uses less compression for high-

ﬁdelity reproduction. Use it with DVDs and CDs that

bear the DTS logo.

DTS 96/24

This mode is for use with DTS 96/24 sources. This is

high-resolution DTS with a 96 kHz sampling rate and

24-bit resolution, providing superior ﬁdelity. Use it with

DVDs that bear the DTS 96/24 logo.

About the Listening Modes

PR-SC885_En.book Page 84 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Using the Listening Modes

—Continued

DTS-ES Discrete

This mode is for use with DTS-ES Discrete soundtracks

that use a discrete surround-back channel for

true

6.1/7.1-channel playback. The seven totally separate

audio channels provide better spatial imaging and 360-

degree sound localization, perfect for sounds that pan

across the surround channels. Use it with DVDs that bear

the DTS-ES logo, especially those with a DTS-ES Dis-

crete soundtrack.

DTS-ES Matrix

This mode is for use with DTS-ES Matrix soundtracks

that use a matrix-encoded back-channel for 6.1/7.1-

channel playback. Use it with DVDs that bear the DTS-

ES logo.

DTS-HD High Resolution

Developed for use with HDTV, including the new video

disc formats Blu-ray and HD DVD, this is the latest mul-

tichannel audio format from DTS. It supports up to 7.1

channels with 96 kHz/24-bit sampling rate and signal

resolution.

DTS-HD Master Audio

Designed to take full advantage of the additional storage

space offered by the new Blu-ray and HD DVD disc for-

mats, this new DTS format offers up to 7.1 discrete chan-

nels of uncompressed digital audio with 96 kHz/24-bit

sampling rate and signal resolution.

The AV controller supports 7.1-channel sources up to

96 kHz and 5.1-channel sources up to 192 kHz.

Neural THX 5.1/7.1

Neural-THX Surround employs psychoacoustic fre-

quency domain processing, which allows delivery of a

more detailed sound stage, with superior channel separa-

tion and localization of audio elements. The Neural THX

5.1 and Neural THX 7.1 modes can expand any 2-chan-

nel stereo source for 5.1- or 7.1-channel playback,

respectively. Use them with CD, radio, cassette, TV,

VHS, DVD, and other 2-channel stereo sources, includ-

ing video games. Neural-THX Surround can also be

used by broadcasters to encode and transmit surround-

sound content over a stereo signal, which listeners can

enjoy as either surround sound or normal stereo. XM

Satellite Radio, for example, is using Neural-THX Sur-

round on select channels, which the AV controller can

expand from 5.1 channels to 7.1 channels.

DSD

DSD stands for

Direct Stream Digital

and is the format

used to store digital audio on Super Audio CDs (SACD).

This mode can be used with SACDs that feature multi-

channel audio.

THX

Founded by George Lucas, THX develops stringent stan-

dards that ensure movies are reproduced in movie the-

aters and home theaters just as the director intended.

• THX Cinema

This mode is for watching movies, which are typi-

cally recorded and edited on the assumption that they

will be played in a sizable place like a movie theater.

It carefully optimizes the tonal and spatial character-

istics of the soundtrack for reproduction in the

smaller home-theater environment. It can be used

with 2-channel sources processed with other for-

mats, and multichannel sources. Surround back

speaker output depends on the source material and

the selected listening mode.

• THX Ultra2 Cinema

This mode expands 5.1-channel sources for 7.1-

channel playback. It does this by analyzing the com-

position of the surround source, optimizing the

ambient and directional sounds to produce the sur-

round back channel output.

• THX Music Mode

This mode is designed for use with music. It expands

5.1-channel sources for 7.1-channel playback.

• THX Games Mode

This mode is designed for use with video games. It

can expand 2-channel and 5.1-channel sources for

6.1/7.1-channel playback.

• THX Surround EX

This mode expands 5.1-channel sources for 6.1/7.1-

channel playback. It’s especially suited to Dolby

Digital EX sources. THX Surround EX, also known

as Dolby Digital Surround EX, is a joint develop-

ment between Dolby Laboratories and THX Ltd.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 85 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Using the Listening Modes

—Continued

Onkyo Original DSP Modes

Mono Movie

This mode is suitable for old movies and other mono

sources. The center speaker outputs the sound as it is,

while reverb is applied to the sound output by the other

speakers, giving presence to even mono material.

Orchestra

Suitable for classical or operatic music, this mode

emphasizes the surround channels in order to widen the

stereo image and simulates the natural reverberation of a

large hall.

Unplugged

Suitable for acoustic instruments, vocals, and jazz, this

mode emphasizes the front stereo image, giving the

impression of being right in front of the stage.

Studio-Mix

Suitable for rock or pop music, listening to music in this

mode creates a lively sound ﬁeld with a powerful acous-

tic image, like being at a club or rock concert.

TV Logic

This mode adds realistic acoustics to TV shows pro-

duced in a TV studio, surround effects to the entire

sound, and clarity to voices.

All Ch Stereo

Ideal for background music, this mode ﬁlls the entire lis-

tening area with stereo sound from the front, surround,

and surround back speakers.

Full Mono

In this mode, all speakers output the same sound in

mono, so the sound you hear is the same regardless of

where you are within the listening room.

T-D (Theater-Dimensional)

With this mode, you can enjoy virtual 5.1 surround

sound even with only two or three speakers. It works by

controlling how sounds reach the listener’s left and right

ears. Good results may not be possible if there’s too

much reverb, so we recommend that you use this mode

in an environment with little or no natural reverb.

Note:

• Since the Onkyo original DSP modes use the Dolby

PLIIx and Neo:6 circuits for processing, when one of

these modes is selected, the PLIIx indicator, or Neo:6

indicator for multichannel sources, lights up.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 86 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Recording

This section explains how to record the input source and

how to record audio and video from separate sources.

Notes:

•The surround sound and DSP listening modes cannot

be recorded.

• Copy-protected DVDs cannot be recorded.

• Sources connected to the analog multichannel input

cannot be recorded.

•Various restrictions apply to digital recording. Refer to

the manuals supplied with your digital recording

equipment for more details.

•Digital input signals are output by only the digital out-

puts, and analog input signals are output by only the

analog outputs. There is no internal conversion from

digital to analog or vice versa.

• DTS signals will be recorded as noise, so don’t

attempt analog recording of DTS CDs or LDs.

• While the Pure Audio listening mode is selected, the

VCR/DVR OUT V and S jacks don’t output video sig-

nals, so select another mode when recording.

Audio sources can be recorded to a recorder (e.g., cas-

sette deck, CDR, MD) connected to the TAPE OUT or

DIGITAL OPTICAL OUT jacks. Video sources can be

recorded to a video recorder (e.g., VCR, DVR) con-

nected to the VCR/DVR OUT jacks. See pages 26 to 42

for hookup information.

Note:

•If you select a different input source during recording,

that input source will be recorded instead.

You can overdub audio onto your video recordings by

simultaneously recording audio and video from two sep-

arate sources. This is possible because only the audio

source is switched when an audio-only input source,

such as TAPE, TUNER, or CD, is selected, the video

source remains the same.

In the following example, audio from the CD player con-

nected to the CD IN and video from the camcorder con-

nected to the AUX 2 INPUT VIDEO jack are recorded

by the VCR connected to the VCR/DVR OUT jacks.

Recording the Input Source

Use the input selector buttons to

select the source that you want

to record.

See “Which Connections Should I

Use?” on page 27 to see which signals

can be output and recorded.

You can watch the source while record-

ing it. The AV controller’s MASTER

VOLUME control has no effect on

recording.

On your recorder, start record-

ing.

On the source component, start

playback.

CDTUNER

TAPE

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV AUX 1 AUX 2

VCR/DVR

DVD

PHONO

Remote

controller

DVD

AUX1AUX

GAME/TV

CBL/SATVCR/DVR

TUNER

TAPE

PHONO

+10

123

456

789

Recording from Different AV Sources

Prepare the camcorder and CD player for

playback.

Prepare the VCR for recording.

Press the [AUX 2] input selector button.

Press the [CD] input selector button.

This selects the CD player as the audio source but

leaves the camcorder as the video source.

Start recording on the VCR, then start

playback on the camcorder and CD player.

Video from the camcorder and audio from the CD

player are recorded by the VCR.

SIRIUS

RS232

DIGITAL

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

REMOTE

CONTROL

IN 1

IN 2

IN IN IN IN

PHONO CD TAPE AUX 1

GAME/TV

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

CBL/SAT

AUX 1 VCR/DVR

VCR/DVR DVD

DVD

IN 2

IN 3

ASSIGNABLE

(DVD)

(CBL/SAT)

(VCR/DVR)

(GAME/TV)

(CD)

OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

ASSIGNABLE

IN 3

IN 2 IN

1(DVD)

MONITOR

OUT 1

OUT IN IN OUT IN IN FRONT FRONTCENTER

SUBWOOFER SUBWOOFER

CENTERSURR SURR

MULTI CH PRE OUT

SURR BACK SURR BACK

ETHERNET

MONITOR OUT 2

/ZONE 2 OUT

12V TRIGGER OUT

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

ZONE 2

OUT

GND

HDMI

IN 1IN 2IN 3IN 4

ASSIGNABLE

OUT

MAIN OUT

SUB

COLD

HOT GND

INPUT

BALANCE R FRONT R FRONT LSURR R CENTER SURR L

SURR BACK R

Bi-AMP

MONO

BALANCE L

PUSH TO OPEN

VIDEO

S VIDEO DIGITAL

AUX 2 INPUT

AUDIOLR

Camcorder

VCR

CD player

video signal

audio signal

PR-SC885_En.book Page 87 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Onscreen Setup Menus

The onscreen setup menus appear on the connected TV and provide a conve-

nient way to change the AV controller’s various settings. Settings are orga-

nized into eight categories on the

main menu

, most containing a

submenu

The following map shows how the setup menus are organized. Use the page numbers to locate information about items.

Menu Map

1.Input/Output Assign

2.Speaker Setup

3.Audio Adjust

4.Source Setup

5.ListeningMode Preset

6.Miscellaneous

7.Hardware Setup

8.Lock Setup

4.Source Setup

DVD

1.Input/Output Assign

2.Speaker Setup

3.Audio Adjust

4.Source Setup

5.Listening Mode Preset

6.Miscellaneous

7.Hardware Setup

8.Lock Setup

6.Miscellaneous

1.Volume Setup

2.OSD Setup

7.Hardware Setup

1.Remote Control

2.Zone2/Zone3

3.Tuner

4.Analog Multich

5.HDMI

8.Lock Setup

Lock Unlocked

1.Input/Output Assign

1.Monitor Out

2.HDMI Input

3.Component Video Input

4.Digital Input

5.Analog Input

2.Speaker Setup

1.Speaker Settings

2.Speaker Config

3.Speaker Distance

4.Level Calibration

5.Equalizer Settings

6.THX Audio Setup

3.Audio Adjust

1.Tone Control

2.Direct

3.Multiplex/Mono

4.PL x/Neo:6

5.Dolby EX

6.Theater-Dimensional

7.LFE Level

1.IntelliVolume

2.A/V Sync

3.Name Edit

4.Satellite Radio

5.SIRIUS Parental Lock

5.Listening Mode Preset

1.DVD

2.VCR/DVR

3.CBL/SAT

4.GAME/TV

5.AUX1

6.AUX2

7.TAPE

8.TUNER

9.CD

10.PHONO

Main menu Submenu

☞

pages 45–51

☞

pages 94–100

☞

page 90

☞

page 92

☞

pages 101–102

page 44

☞

page 104

☞

page 108

☞

page 106

PR-SC885_En.book Page 88 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Adjusting the Listening Modes

With the Re-EQ function, you can compensate a

soundtrack whose high-frequency content is too harsh,

making it more suitable for home theater viewing.

This function can be used with the following listening

modes: Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Pro

Logic II Movie, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie, DTS, DTS-

ES, DTS Neo:6 Cinema, DTS 96/24, THX Cinema,

THX Surround EX, THX Ultra2 Cinema, and Multi-

channel.

With the Late Night function, you can reduce the

dynamic range of Dolby Digital material so that you can

still hear quiet parts even when listening at low volume

levels—ideal for watching movies late at night when you

don’t want to disturb anyone.

Notes:

• The Late Night function can be used only when the

input source is Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, or

Dolby TrueHD.

• The effect of the Late Night function depends on the

material that you are playing and the intention of the

original sound designer, and with some material there

will be little or no effect when you select the different

options.

•The Late Night function is set to Off when the AV con-

troller is set to Standby. For Dolby TrueHD sources, it

will be set to Auto.

Using the Re-EQ Function

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE

MODE button, followed by the

[Re-EQ] button.

Press the [Re-EQ] button again to turn

off the Re-EQ function.

INPUT SELECTOR

LISTENING MODE

ON STANDBY

DISPLAY MUTING

RC-

690

DIMMER

CDR/MD

SAT

TAPE/AMP

SLEEP

MACRO

REMOTE MODE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

REPEAT

PLAY MODE

---

10 11 12

VIDEO OFFOPEN/CLOSE

TV CH

TV VOL

PLAYLIST

RANDOM

DVD

AUX1AUX

GAME/TV

CBL/SATVCR/DVR

D. TUN

TUNER

TAPE

PHONO

VCRVCR DVDDVD HDDHDD

REC

ENTER

TEST TONE

AUDIO SEL

CH SEL

SURR

DIRECT

THX

PURE A

STEREO

LEVEL

L NIGHT

ALL ST

VOL

DISC

ALBUM

VCR

CABLE DOCK

DVD

RECEIVER

123

ZONE

INPUT

+10 0

CLEAR

123

456

789

Re-EQ

SETUP

RECEIVER

L NIGHT

Re-EQ

ENTER

Re-EQ

RECEIVER

Using the Late Night Function

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE

MODE button, and then press the

[L NIGHT] button repeatedly.

For Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital

Plus sources, the options are:

Off:

Late Night function off

(default).

Low:

Small reduction in dynamic

range.

High:

Large reduction in dynamic

range.

For Dolby TrueHD sources, the options

are:

Auto:

The dynamic range is con-

trolled automatically based

on the source material and the

current volume setting

(default).

Off:

Late Night function off.

On:

Late Night function on.

L NIGHT

RECEIVER

PR-SC885_En.book Page 89 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Adjusting the Listening Modes

—Continued

With the Audio Adjust functions and settings, you can

adjust the sound and listening modes as you like.

Tone Control Settings

You can adjust the tone (bass and treble) of the front,

center, surround, and surround back speakers individu-

ally. For the subwoofer, you can adjust the bass.

■

Bass

You can boost or cut low-frequency sounds from –10 dB

to +10 dB in 1 dB steps.

■

Treble

You can boost or cut high-frequency sounds from

–10 dB to +10 dB in 1 dB steps.

Note:

•The tone control circuits are bypassed when the Direct

or Pure Audio listening mode is selected.

Adjusting the Tone on the AV Controller

Notes:

• The tone cannot be adjusted on the AV controller

when the Direct or Pure Audio listening mode is

selected.

•The tone control settings do not apply to the THX lis-

tening modes.

Audio Adjust

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE

MODE button, followed by the

[SETUP] button.

The main menu appears onscreen.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “3. Audio

Adjust,” and then press [ENTER].

The Audio Adjust menu appears.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select an item, and

then press [ENTER].

The screen for that item appears.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select an option, and

use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]

buttons to change it.

The Audio Adjust menu items are

explained below.

When you’ve ﬁnished, press the

[SETUP] button.

Setup closes.

RECEIVER

ENTER

3.Audio Adjust

1.Tone Control

2.Direct

3.Multiplex/Mono

4.PL x/Neo:6

5.Dolby EX

6.Theater-Dimensional

7.LFE Level

ENTER

Press the AV controller’s [TONE]

button repeatedly to select Bass

or Treble for Front, Center, Sur-

round, SurrBack, or Subwoofer.

Use the Up [ ] and Down [ ]

buttons to adjust.

STANDBY/ON

MASTER VOLUME

CDTUNER

TAPECBL/SAT GAME/TV AUX 1 AUX 2VCR/DVR

DVDAUDIO SELPURE AUDIO PHONO DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

OFF TONE HDMI OUT

DIGITAL INPUT

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

LEVEL

PHONES POWER

ON OFF

STEREO THX

RT/PTY/TP

MEMORY

LISTENING MODE

TUNING

MODE SETUP

PRESET

TUNING

TUNING RETURN

ENTER

SETUP MIC

VIDEO

S VIDEO DIGITAL

AUX 2 INPUT

AUDIOLR

CLEAR

STANDBY

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

TONE

PR-SC885_En.book Page 90 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Adjusting the Listening Modes

—Continued

Direct Setting

Delay Enable

■

DSD

This setting determines whether or not DSD (SACD)

audio signals are passed through the DSP for A/V Sync,

delay, etc., processing when the Direct listening mode is

selected.

No:

DSD signals are not processed by the DSP.

Yes:

DSD signals are processed by the DSP.

Multiplex/Mono Settings

Multiplex

■

Input Ch

This setting determines which channel of a stereo multi-

plex source is output. Use it to select audio channels or

languages with multiplex sources, multilingual TV

broadcasts, and so on.

Main:

The main channel is output (default).

Sub:

The sub channel is output.

Main/Sub:

Both the main and sub channels are out-

put.

Mono

■

Input Ch

This setting determines which channel is output when

the Mono listening mode is used with a stereo source.

L+R:

Both the left and right channels are output

(default).

Only the left channel is output.

Only the right channel is output.

■

Output Speaker

This setting determines which speakers output mono

audio when the Mono listening mode is selected.

L/R:

Mono audio is output by the front left and right

speakers.

Mono audio is output by the center speaker

(default).

PLIIx/Neo:6 Settings

PLIIx Music (2 ch Input)

These settings apply to only 2-channel stereo sources.

If you’re not using any surround back speakers, these

settings apply to Dolby Pro Logic II, not Dolby Pro

Logic IIx.

■

Panorama

With this setting, you can broaden the width of the front

stereo image when using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music

listening mode.

On:

Panorama function on.

Off:

Panorama function off (default).

■

Dimension

With this setting, you can move the sound ﬁeld forward

or backward when using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music

listening mode. It can be adjusted from –3 to +3. The

default value is 0. Higher settings move the sound ﬁeld

forward. Lower settings move it backward.

If the stereo image feels too wide, or there’s too much

surround sound, move the sound ﬁeld forward to

improve the balance. Conversely, if the stereo image

feels like it’s in mono, or there’s not enough surround

sound, move it backward.

■

Center Width

With this setting, you can adjust the width of the sound

from the center speaker when using the Dolby Pro Logic

IIx Music listening mode. Normally, if you’re using a

center speaker, the center channel sound is output by

only the center speaker. (If you’re not using a center

speaker, the center channel sound will be distributed to

the front left and right speakers to create a phantom cen-

ter). This setting controls the front left, right, and center

mix, allowing you to adjust the weight of the center

channel sound. It can be adjusted from 0 to 7. The default

value is 3.

Neo:6 Music

■

Center Image

The DTS Neo:6 Music listening mode creates 6-channel

surround sound from 2-channel stereo sources. With this

setting, you can specify by how much the front left and

right channel output is attenuated in order to create the

center channel. It can be adjusted from 0 to 5. The

default value is 3.

When set to 0, the front left and right channel output is

attenuated by half (–6 dB), giving the impression that the

sound is located centrally. This setting works well when

the listening position is considerably off center. When

set to 5, the front left and right channels are not attenu-

ated, maintaining the original stereo balance.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 91 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Adjusting the Listening Modes

—Continued

Dolby Digital Settings

■

Dolby EX

This setting determines how Dolby EX signals are han-

dled.

Auto:

When the source is Dolby EX, you can select

the Dolby EX or THX Surround EX listening

mode.

Manual:

When the source is Dolby EX, you can select

any of the listening modes compatible with this

format (e.g., Dolby EX, Dolby Pro Logic IIx,

etc.).

T–D (Theater-Dimensional) Setting

■

Listening Angle

With this setting, you can optimize the Theater-Dimen-

sional listening mode by specifying the angle of the front

left and right speakers relative to the listening position.

Ideally, the front left and right speakers should be equi-

distant from the listening position and at an angle close

to one of the two available settings.

Narrow:

Select if the angle is less than 30 degrees.

Wide:

Select if the angle is greater than 30 degrees.

LFE Level Settings

With these settings, you can set the level of the LFE

(Low Frequency Effects) channel individually for Dolby

Digital, DTS, and multichannel PCM sources. The level

can be set to –

∞

, –20 dB, –10 dB, or 0 dB (default).

If you ﬁnd that low-frequency effects are too loud when

using one of these sources, change the setting to –20 dB

or –

∞

dB.

■

Dolby Digital

Sets the level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital

sources.

■

DTS

Sets the level of the LFE channel for DTS sources.

■

Dolby TrueHD

Sets the level of the LFE channel for Dolby TrueHD

sources.

■

DTS-HD Master Audio

Sets the level of the LFE channel for DTS-HD Master

Audio sources.

■

DSD

Sets the level of the LFE channel for DSD sources.

■

Multich PCM

Sets the level of the LFE channel for multichannel PCM

sources. (Multichannel PCM is input via HDMI.)

On the Listening Mode Preset menu, you can specify a

default listening mode for each of the audio formats sup-

ported by each input selector. The AV controller will

then select the listening mode automatically depending

on the format of the input signal. You can still select the

other listening modes, although the default listening

mode will be used the next time you turn on the AV con-

troller.

30˚

Front left speaker Front right speaker

Listening Mode Presets

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE

MODE button, followed by the

[SETUP] button.

The main menu appears onscreen.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “5. Listening

Mode Preset,” and then press

[ENTER].

The Listening Mode Preset menu

appears.

INPUT SELECTOR

DISPLAY MUTING

DIMMER

CDR/MD

SAT

TAPE/AMP

SLEEP

MACRO

REMOTE MODE

ENTER

VOL

DISC

ALBUM

VCR

CABLE DOCK

DVD

RECEIVER

123

ZONE

SETUP

RECEIVER

ENTER

RECEIVER

ENTER

5.Listening Mode Preset

1.DVD

2.VCR/DVR

3.CBL/SAT

4.GAME/TV

5.AUX1

6.AUX2

7.TAPE

8.TUNER

9.CD

10.PHONO

PR-SC885_En.book Page 92 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Adjusting the Listening Modes

—Continued

Note:

• This procedure can also be performed on the AV con-

troller by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow

buttons.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select an input selec-

tor, and then press [ENTER].

The audio formats supported by that

input selector appear.

If the input selector is assigned to an

HDMI IN, use the Down [ ] button to

select the audio formats shown on the

following screen.

For the TUNER input selector, Analog

is the only format available.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select an audio for-

mat, and use the Left and Right

[ ]/[ ] buttons to select a lis-

tening mode.

Only listening modes compatible with

the audio format can be selected (see

page 80).

Analog/PCM:

Speciﬁes the default lis-

tening mode for analog and PCM

sources.

Dolby Digital:

Speciﬁes the default lis-

tening mode for Dolby Digital sources.

DTS:

Speciﬁes the default listening

mode for DTS sources.

D.F. 2ch:

Speciﬁes the default listening

mode for 2-channel (2/0) stereo sources

in a digital format, such as Dolby Digi-

tal or DTS.

D.F. Mono:

Speciﬁes the default listen-

ing mode for mono sources in a digital

format, such as Dolby Digital or DTS.

Multich PCM:

Speciﬁes the default

listening mode for multichannel PCM

sources, such as DVD-Audio (input via

HDMI).

192/176.4k:

Speciﬁes the default lis-

tening mode for high resolution

192 kHz and 176.4 kHz digital sources,

such as DVD-Audio.

ENTER

5-x.Listening Mode Preset

Analog/PCM Last Valid

Dolby Digital Last Valid

DTS Last Valid

D.F.2ch Last Valid

D.F.Mono Last Valid

5-x.Listening Mode Preset

Multich PCM Last Valid

192k/176.4k Last Valid

Dolby True HD Last Valid

DTS-HD Master Audio Last Valid

DSD Last Valid

ENTER

Dolby TrueHD:

Speciﬁes the default

listening mode for Dolby TrueHD

sources, such as Blu-ray or HD DVD

(input via HDMI).

DTS-HD Master Audio:

Speciﬁes the

default listening mode for DTS-HD

Master Audio sources, such as Blu-ray

or HD DVD (input via HDMI).

DSD Multi:

Speciﬁes the default lis-

tening mode for DSD multichannel

sources, such as SACD.

When you’ve ﬁnished, press the

[SETUP] button.

Setup closes.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 93 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Advanced Setup

This section explains items on the Speaker Conﬁg menu.

Some of the speaker settings are set automatically by the

Automatic Speaker Setup function (see page 52).

Speaker Settings

See “Speaker Settings” on page 44.

Speaker Conﬁguration

With the Speaker Conﬁguration settings, you can specify

which speakers are connected and a crossover frequency

for each speaker.

The following crossover frequencies can be speciﬁed:

Full Band, 40 Hz, 45 Hz, 50 Hz, 55 Hz, 60 Hz, 70 Hz,

80 Hz (THX), 90 Hz, 100 Hz, 110 Hz, 120 Hz, 130 Hz,

150 Hz, or 200 Hz.

Specify Full Band for speakers that can output low-fre-

quency bass sounds adequately, for example, speakers

with a good sized woofer. For smaller speakers, specify

a crossover frequency. Sounds below the crossover fre-

quency will then be output by the subwoofer instead of

the speaker. Refer to your speakers’ manuals to deter-

mine the optimum crossover frequencies.

If you’re using THX-certiﬁed speakers, specify

80 Hz (THX) for all speakers.

Speaker Setup

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE

MODE button, followed by the

[SETUP] button.

The main menu appears onscreen.

INPUT SELECTOR

DISPLAY MUTING

DIMMER

CDR/MD

SAT

TAPE/AMP

SLEEP

MACRO

REMOTE MODE

PLAYLIST

RANDOMREC

ENTER

VOL

DISC

ALBUM

VCR

CABLE DOCK

DVD

RECEIVER

123

ZONE

SETUP

RECEIVER

ENTER

These settings are set automatically by the Automatic

Speaker Setup function (see page 52).

RECEIVER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “2. Speaker

Setup,” and then press [ENTER].

The Speaker Setup menu appears.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “2. Speaker

Conﬁg,” and then press [ENTER].

The Speaker Conﬁg screen appears.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “Subwoofer,”

and then use the Left and Right

[ ]/[ ] buttons to select:

Yes:

Select if a subwoofer is con-

nected.

No:

Select if no subwoofer is con-

nected.

ENTER

2.Speaker Setup

1.Speaker Settings

2.Speaker Config

3.Speaker Distance

4.Level Calibration

5.Equalizer Settings

6.THX Audio Setup

ENTER

2-2.Speaker Config

Subwoofer Yes

Front Full Band

Center 100Hz

Surround 100Hz

Surr Back 100Hz

Surr Back Ch 2ch

LPF of LFE 120Hz

Double Bass On

ENTER

PR-SC885_En.book Page 94 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Advanced Setup

—Continued

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “Front,” and

then use the Left and Right

[ ]/[ ] buttons to select a

crossover frequency.

Note:

• Fixed at Full Band if Subwoofer

(step 4) is set to No.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “Center,” and

then use the Left and Right

[ ]/[ ] buttons to select a

crossover frequency.

If no center speaker is connected, select

None.

Note:

• Cannot select Full Band if Front

(step 5) is set to anything other than

Full Band.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “Surround,” and

then use the Left and Right

[ ]/[ ] buttons to select a

crossover frequency.

If no surround left and right speakers

are connected, select None.

Note:

• Cannot select Full Band if Front

(step 5) is set to anything other than

Full Band.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “Surr Back,”

and then use the Left and Right

[ ]/[ ] buttons to select a

crossover frequency.

If no surround back speakers are con-

nected, select None.

Notes:

• Cannot be set if Speaker Type is set

to Bi-Amp (page 44) or Surround is

set to None (step 7).

•Cannot select Full Band if Surround

(step 7) is set to anything other than

Full Band.

ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “Surr Back Ch,”

and then use the Left and Right

[ ]/[ ] buttons to select:

1ch:

Select if one surround back

speaker is connected.

2ch:

Select if two (left and right)

surround back speakers are

connected.

Note:

• Cannot be set if Speaker Type is set

to Bi-Amp (page 44) or SurrBack is

set to None (step 8).

Continue with step 10 on the next page.

ENTER

PR-SC885_En.book Page 95 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Advanced Setup

—Continued

Low-Pass Filter for the LFE Channel

With this setting, you can specify the cutoff frequency of

the LFE channel’s low-pass ﬁlter (LPF), which can be

used to ﬁlter out unwanted hum. The LPF only applies to

sources that use the LFE channel.

* If you’re using THX-certiﬁed speakers, select

80 Hz (THX).

Double Bass

With this setting, you can boost bass output by feeding

front left and right channel bass sounds to the subwoofer.

This setting can only be made if the Subwoofer setting in

step 4 is set to Yes, and the Front setting in step 5 is set

to Full Band.

* If you’re using THX-certiﬁed speakers, select Off

(THX).

Note:

• This procedure can also be performed on the AV con-

troller by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow

buttons.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “LPF of LFE,”

and then use the Left and Right

[ ]/[ ] buttons to select a low-

pass ﬁlter frequency.

The following low-pass ﬁlter frequen-

cies can be selected: 80 Hz (THX),

90 Hz, 100 Hz, 110 Hz, or 120 Hz.

Continue with step 11 in the next col-

umn.

This setting is not set automatically by the Automatic

Speaker Setup function (see page 52).

ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “Double Bass,”

and then use the Left and Right

[ ]/[ ] buttons to select:

Off (THX):

The subwoofer only out-

puts the LFE channel.

On:

In addition to LFE channel

sounds, the subwoofer out-

puts front left and right chan-

nel bass sounds.

Press the [SETUP] button.

Setup closes.

This setting is not set automatically by the Automatic

Speaker Setup function (see page 52).

ENTER

PR-SC885_En.book Page 96 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Advanced Setup

—Continued

Speaker Distance

With the Speaker Distance settings, you can specify the

distance from each speaker to the listening position.

Note:

• This procedure can also be performed on the AV con-

troller by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow

buttons.

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE

MODE button, followed by the

[SETUP] button.

The main menu appears onscreen.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “2. Speaker

Setup,” and then press [ENTER].

The Speaker Setup menu appears.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “3. Speaker Dis-

tance,” and then press [ENTER].

The Speaker Distance screen appears.

Note:

•Speakers that you set to No or None

in the Speaker Conﬁguration

(page 94) cannot be selected.

These settings are set automatically by the Automatic

Speaker Setup function (see page 52).

RECEIVER

ENTER

2.Speaker Setup

1.Speaker Settings

2.Speaker Config

3.Speaker Distance

4.Level Calibration

5.Equalizer Settings

6.THX Audio Setup

ENTER

2-3.Speaker Distance

Unit feet

Left 12.0ft

Center 12.0ft

Right 12.0ft

Surr Right 12.0ft

Surr Back R 12.0ft

Surr Back L 12.0ft

Surr Left 12.0ft

Subwoofer 12.0ft

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “Unit,” and then

use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select:

feet:

Select if you want to enter

distances in feet. Can be set

from 0.2 to 30 feet in 0.2-foot

steps.

meters:

Select if you want to enter

distances in meters. Can be

set from 0.06 to 9 meters in

0.06-meter steps.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select a speaker, and

use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]

buttons to specify the distance.

Specify the distance from the speaker

to your listening position.

Notes:

• The Center distance cannot be set if

Center is set to None in the Speaker

Conﬁguration (page 94).

• The Surr Right and Surr Left dis-

tances cannot be set if Surround is set

to None in the Speaker Conﬁguration

(page 94).

• The Surr Back R and Surr Back L

distances cannot be set if Speaker

Type is set to Bi-Amp (page 44) or

Surr Back is set to None in the

Speaker Conﬁguration (page 94).

• The Subwoofer distance cannot be

set if Subwoofer is set to No (step 4).

Repeat step 5 for each speaker.

Press the [SETUP] button.

Setup closes.

ENTER

PR-SC885_En.book Page 97 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Advanced Setup

—Continued

Speaker Level Calibration

With the Level Calibration settings, you can adjust the

level of each speaker while listening to the test tone so

that the volume of each speaker is the same at the listen-

ing position.

Note:

• The test tone is output at the standard level for THX,

which is 0 dB (absolute volume setting 82). If you nor-

mally listen at volume settings below this, be careful

because the test tone will be much louder.

Note:

•Speaker levels can also be adjusted by using the dedi-

cated buttons on the remote controller. Press the

[TEST TONE] button to output the test tone. Use the

[CH SEL] button to select each speaker, and use the

[LEVEL–] and [LEVEL+] buttons to adjust the level.

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE

MODE button, followed by the

[SETUP] button.

The main menu appears onscreen.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “2. Speaker

Setup,” and then press [ENTER].

The Speaker Setup menu appears.

These settings are set automatically by the Automatic

Speaker Setup function (see page 52).

RECEIVER

ENTER

2.Speaker Setup

1.Speaker Settings

2.Speaker Config

3.Speaker Distance

4.Level Calibration

5.Equalizer Settings

6.THX Audio Setup

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “4. Level Cali-

bration,” and then press

[ENTER].

The Level Calibration screen appears

and the pink noise test tone is output by

the front left speaker.

Note:

•Levels cannot be adjusted for speak-

ers set to No or None in the Speaker

Conﬁguration (page 94).

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select a speaker, and

use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]

buttons to adjust the level.

Levels can be adjusted from –12 to

+12 dB in 0.5 dB steps (–15 to +12 dB

for the subwoofer).

Repeat step 4 for each speaker

so that the volume of the test

tone from each speaker is the

same.

If you’re using a handheld sound level

meter, adjust the level of each speaker

so that it reads 75 dB SPL at the listen-

ing position, measured with C-weight-

ing and slow reading.

Press the [SETUP] button.

Setup closes.

ENTER

ENTER 2-4.Level Calibration

Left -12.0dB

Center -12.0dB

Right -12.0dB

Surr Right -12.0dB

Surr Back R -12.0dB

Surr Back L -12.0dB

Surr Left -12.0dB

Subwoofer -15.0dB

ENTER

PR-SC885_En.book Page 98 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Advanced Setup

—Continued

Equalizer Settings

With the Equalizer settings, you can adjust the tone of

speakers individually with a 15-band equalizer. The vol-

ume of each speaker can be set on page 98.

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE

MODE button, followed by the

[SETUP] button.

The main menu appears onscreen.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “2. Speaker

Setup,” and then press [ENTER].

The Speaker Setup menu appears.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “5. Equalizer

Settings,” and then press

[ENTER].

The Equalizer Settings screen appears.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ] but-

tons move between the two screens.

These settings are set automatically by the Automatic

Speaker Setup function (see page 52).

RECEIVER

ENTER

2.Speaker Setup

1.Speaker Settings

2.Speaker Config

3.Speaker Distance

4.Level Calibration

5.Equalizer Settings

6.THX Audio Setup

ENTER

2-5.Equalizer Settings

Equalizer Manual

Channel Front

25Hz 0dB

40Hz 0dB

63Hz 0dB

100Hz 0dB

160Hz 0dB

250Hz 0dB

400Hz 0dB

2-5.Equalizer Settings

630Hz 0dB

1000Hz 0dB

1600Hz 0dB

2500Hz 0dB

4000Hz 0dB

6300Hz 0dB

10000Hz 0dB

16000Hz 0dB

Use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]

buttons to set the “Equalizer”

option to:

Off:

Equalizer off, ﬂat response.

Manual:

The equalizer for each

speaker can be set manually.

Audyssey:

The equalizer for each

speaker is set automatically

by the Automatic Speaker

Setup function.

If you selected Manual, continue with

the next step. If you selected Off or

Audyssey, go to step 8.

Use the Down [ ] button to

select “Channel,” and then use

the Left and Right [ ]/[ ] but-

tons to select the speaker.

You can select: Front, Center, Sur-

round, Surr Back, or Subwoofer.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select a frequency,

and use the Left and Right

[ ]/[ ] buttons to cut or boost

that frequency.

You can select: 25 Hz, 40 Hz, 63 Hz,

100 Hz, 160 Hz, 250 Hz, 400 Hz,

630 Hz, 1000 Hz, 1600 Hz, 2500 Hz,

4000 Hz, 6300 Hz, 10000 Hz, or

16000 Hz. And for the subwoofer,

25 Hz, 40 Hz, 63 Hz, 100 Hz, or

160 Hz.

Each band can be cut or boosted from

–6 dB to +6 dB in 1 dB steps.

Tip:

Low frequencies, such as 160 Hz,

affect bass sounds; high frequencies,

such as 6300 Hz, affect treble sounds.

ENTER

PR-SC885_En.book Page 99 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

100

Advanced Setup

—Continued

Notes:

• This procedure can also be performed on the AV con-

troller by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow

buttons.

• The Equalizer settings have no effect on 176.4/

192 kHz input signals.

THX Audio Setup

With the Surr Back Sp Spacing setting, you can specify

the distance between your surround back speakers.

If you’re using a THX-certiﬁed subwoofer, set the THX

Subwoofer setting to Yes. You can then apply THX’s

Boundary Gain Compensation (BGC) to compensate the

perceived exaggeration of low frequencies for listeners

sitting very close to a room boundary (i.e., wall).

Use the Up [ ] button to select

“Channel” again, and use the

Left and Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to

select another speaker.

Repeat steps 6 and 7 for each speaker.

Press the [SETUP] button.

Setup closes.

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE

MODE button, followed by the

[SETUP] button.

The main menu appears onscreen.

ENTER

These settings are not set automatically by the Auto-

matic Speaker Setup function (see page 52).

RECEIVER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “2. Speaker

Setup,” and then press [ENTER].

The Speaker Setup menu appears.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “6. THX Audio

Setup,” and then press [ENTER].

The THX Audio Setup screen appears.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “Surr Back Sp

Spacing,” and use the Left and

Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to specify

the distance between your sur-

round back speakers:

< 1 ft (< 0.3 m) (Default):

Select this if

your surround back speakers are

between 0 and 1 foot (0–30 cm) apart.

1–4 ft (0.3–1.2 m):

Select this if your

surround back speakers are between 1

and 4 feet (0.3–1.2 m) apart.

>4 ft (>1.2 m):

Select this if your sur-

round back speakers are more than 4

feet (1.2 m) apart.

Note:

• This setting is only available if the

Surr Back Ch setting in the Speaker

Conﬁguration is set to 2ch (page 95).

ENTER

2.Speaker Setup

1.Speaker Settings

2.Speaker Config

3.Speaker Distance

4.Level Calibration

5.Equalizer Settings

6.THX Audio Setup

ENTER

2-6.THX Audio Setup

Surr Back Sp Spacing 1ft-4ft

THX Subwoofer Yes

BGC Off

ENTER

PR-SC885_En.book Page 100 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

101

Advanced Setup

—Continued

Note:

• This procedure can also be performed on the AV con-

troller by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow

buttons.

This section explains items on the Source Setup menu.

Items can be set individually for each input selector.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “THX Sub-

woofer,” and use the Left and

Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to select:

No:

Select this if you do not have

a THX-certiﬁed subwoofer.

Yes:

Select this if you have a THX-

certiﬁed subwoofer.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “BGC,” and use

the Left and Right [ ]/[ ] but-

tons to select:

Off:

Select this to turn off BGC.

On:

Select this to turn on BGC.

Note:

•This setting is only available if THX

Subwoofer is set to Yes (step 5).

Press the [SETUP] button.

The setup menu closes.

Source Setup

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE

MODE button, and then use the

input selector buttons to select

an input source.

ENTER

RECEIVER

DVD

AUX1AUX

GAME/TV

CBL/SATVCR/DVR

TUNER

TAPE

PHONO

+10

123

456

789

Press the [SETUP] button.

The main menu appears onscreen.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “4. Source

Setup,” and then press [ENTER].

The Source Setup menu appears. The

name of the currently selected input

selector is displayed in a box.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select an item, and

then press [ENTER].

The screen for that item appears.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select an option, and

use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]

buttons to change it.

The Source Setup menu items are

explained below.

ENTER

4.Source Setup

1.IntelliVolume

2.A/V Sync

3.Name Edit

4.Satellite Radio

5.SIRIUS Parental Lock

DVD

ENTER

PR-SC885_En.book Page 101 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

102

Advanced Setup

—Continued

IntelliVolume

With IntelliVolume, you can set the input level for each

input selector individually. This is useful if one of your

source components is louder or quieter than the others.

Use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to set the level.

If a component is noticeably louder than the others, use

the Left [ ] button to reduce its input level. If it’s

noticeably quieter, use the Right [ ] button to increase

its input level. The input level can be adjusted from

–12 dB to +12 dB in 1 dB steps.

Note:

• IntelliVolume does not apply for Zone 2 or Zone 3.

A/V Sync

When using your DVD player’s progressive scanning

function, you may ﬁnd that the picture and sound are out

of sync. With the A/V Sync setting, you can correct this

by applying a delay to the audio signal. The delay can be

set from 0 to 250 milliseconds (msec) in 5 millisecond

steps.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ] buttons to select an

input selector, and use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ] but-

tons to set the delay.

To view the TV picture while setting the delay, press

[ENTER].

If HDMI Lip Sync is enabled (see page 107), and your

TV or display supports HDMI Lip Sync, the displayed

delay time will be the A/V Sync delay time. The HDMI

Lip Sync delay time is displayed underneath in parenthe-

ses.

Note:

•A/V Sync cannot be set when the Pure Audio listening

mode is selected, or when the Direct listening mode is

used with an analog input source.

Name Edit

You can enter a custom name for each individual input

selector and radio preset for easy identiﬁcation. When

selected, the custom name will appear on the display.

When you’ve ﬁnished, press the

[SETUP] button.

Setup closes.

4-2.A/V Sync

A/V Sync 100msec

(HDMI LipSync 60msec)

Press Enter to see picture

DVD

Select the input selector to which

you want to give a custom name.

To name a radio preset, use the

[TUNER] button to select AM or FM,

and then select the preset.

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE

MODE button, followed by the

[SETUP] button.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “4. Source

Setup,” and then press [ENTER].

The Source Setup menu appears.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “Name Edit,”

and then press [ENTER].

The Name Edit screen appears.

If you’re naming an item for the very

ﬁrst time, go to step 6.

If the item already has a name, you can

select Default or Custom in step 5.

RECEIVER

ENTER

4.Source Setup

1.IntelliVolume

2.A/V Sync

3.Name Edit

4.Satellite Radio

5.SIRIUS Parental Lock

DVD

ENTER

4-3.Name Edit

Display Default

Name [ ]

DVD

PR-SC885_En.book Page 102 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

103

Advanced Setup

—Continued

Notes:

•To store a name, you must select “OK” and press

[ENTER] in step 7, otherwise it will not be saved.

•You cannot enter a custom name for XM or SIRIUS

radio presets.

• This procedure can also be performed on the AV con-

troller by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow

buttons.

Satellite Radio

This item is for use with satellite radio. It’s not available

if Satellite Radio is set to None (see page 107). See

pages 62–70 for more information.

SIRIUS Parental Lock

This item is for use with SIRIUS Satellite Radio. It’s not

available if Satellite Radio is set to None or XM (see

page 107). See page 70 for more information.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “Display,” and

use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select:

Default:

The default name is dis-

played.

Custom:

The custom name is dis-

played.

When Default is selected, the station’s

frequency appears on the display when

a radio preset is selected.

Press the Down [ ] button to

select “Name,” and then press

[ENTER] to open the character

input screen.

Use the arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]

buttons to select a character, and

then press [ENTER].

Repeat this step to enter up to 10

characters.

To correct a character:

1. Use the arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]

buttons to select the incorrect char-

acter, and then press [ENTER]. The

character input screen opens.

2. Use the arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]

buttons to select the correct charac-

ter, and then press [ENTER].

ENTER

4-3.Name Edit

Name [ ]

ABCDEFGHIJKLM

NOPQRSTUVWXYZ

abcdefghijkom

nopqrstuvwxyz

0123456789-.‘

()+*=/,:;!?_

Cancel

ENTER

When you’ve ﬁnished, use the

arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] buttons

to display the following screen,

select “OK,” and then press

[ENTER].

Press the [SETUP] button.

Setup closes.

ENTER

4-3.Name Edit

ABCDEFGHIJKLM

NOPQRSTUVWXYZ

abcdefghijkom

nopqrstuvwxyz

0123456789-.‘

()+*=/,:;!?_

Cancel

“OK”

Name [ ]

PR-SC885_En.book Page 103 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

104

Advanced Setup

—Continued

This section explains items on the Miscellaneous menu.

Note:

• This procedure can also be performed on the AV con-

troller by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow

buttons.

Volume Setup

■

Volume Display

With this setting, you can choose how the volume level

is displayed.

Absolute:

Display range is Min, 0.5 through 99.5,

Max.

Relative:

Display range is –

∞

dB, –81.5 dB,

–81.0 dB through +18.0 dB.

The absolute value 82 is equivalent to the relative value

0 dB.

■

Muting Level

This setting determines how much the output is muted

when the Muting function is used (see page 76). It can be

set to –

∞

dB (fully muted) or from –50 dB to –10 dB in

10 dB steps.

■

Maximum Volume

With this setting, you can limit the maximum volume.

When the Volume Display setting is set to Absolute, the

Maximum Volume range is Off, 99 to 50. When it’s set

to Relative, the range is Off, +17 dB to –32 dB. To dis-

able this setting, select Off.

Miscellaneous Setup

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE

MODE button, followed by the

[SETUP] button.

The main menu appears onscreen.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select

“6. Miscellaneous,” and then

press [ENTER].

The Miscellaneous menu appears.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select an item, and

then press [ENTER].

The screen for that item appears.

INPUT SELECTOR

DISPLAY MUTING

DIMMER

CDR/MD

SAT

TAPE/AMP

SLEEP

MACRO

REMOTE MODE

---

10 11 12

PLAYLIST

RANDOMREC

ENTER

VOL

DISC

ALBUM

VCR

CABLE DOCK

DVD

RECEIVER

123

ZONE

+10 0

CLEAR

SETUP

RECEIVER

ENTER

RECEIVER

ENTER

6.Miscellaneous

1.Volume Setup

2.OSD Setup

3.12V Trigger A Setup

4.12V Trigger B Setup

5.12V Trigger C Setup

ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select an item, and

use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]

buttons to change it.

The items are explained below.

When you’ve ﬁnished, press the

[SETUP] button.

Setup closes.

ENTER

PR-SC885_En.book Page 104 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

105

Advanced Setup

—Continued

■

Power On Volume

This setting determines what the volume will be each

time the AV controller is turned on.

When the Volume Display preference is set to Absolute,

the range is Last, Min, 1 to Max. When it’s set to Rela-

tive, the range is Last, –

∞

dB, –81 dB to +18 dB.

To use the same volume level as when the AV controller

was last turned off, select Last.

Note:

• The Power On Volume setting cannot be set higher

than the Maximum Volume setting.

■

Headphone Level

With this setting, you can offset the headphone volume

relative to the main volume. This is useful if your head-

phones are too loud or too quiet at the volume setting you

usually use when listening through your speakers. The

headphone level can be set from –12 dB to +12 dB.

■

Zone2 Maximum Volume

With this setting, you can limit the maximum volume for

Zone 2.

When the Volume Display setting is set to Absolute, the

Maximum Volume range is Off, 99 to 50. When it’s set

to Relative, the range is Off, +17 dB to –32 dB. To dis-

able this setting, select Off.

■

Zone2 Power On Volume

This setting determines what the volume will be for

Zone 2 each time the AV controller is turned on.

When the Volume Display preference is set to Absolute,

the range is Last, Min, 1 to Max. When it’s set to Rela-

tive, the range is Last, –

∞

dB, –81 dB to +18 dB.

To use the same volume level as when the AV controller

was last turned off, select Last.

■

Zone3 Maximum Volume

With this setting, you can limit the maximum volume for

Zone 3.

When the Volume Display setting is set to Absolute, the

Maximum Volume range is Off, 99 to 50. When it’s set

to Relative, the range is Off, +17 dB to –32 dB. To dis-

able this setting, select Off.

■

Zone3 Power On Volume

This setting determines what the volume will be for

Zone 3 each time the AV controller is turned on.

When the Volume Display preference is set to Absolute,

the range is Last, Min, 1 to Max. When it’s set to Rela-

tive, the range is Last, –

∞

dB, –81 dB to +18 dB.

To use the same volume level as when the AV controller

was last turned off, select Last.

OSD Setup

■

Immediate Display

This setting determines whether operation details are

displayed onscreen immediately after an AV controller

function is used.

On:

Displayed (default).

Off:

Not displayed.

Even if On is selected, operation details are not output if

the input source is connected to a COMPONENT

VIDEO IN or HDMI IN.

For optimal video performance, THX recommends that

Immediate Display be turned off.

■

Monitor Type

With this setting, you can specify the aspect ratio of your

TV so that menus are displayed properly.

4:3:

Select if your TV is 4:3 (default).

16:9:

Select if your TV is 16:9.

■

Display Position

This setting determines where on the screen operation

details are displayed.

Bottom:

Bottom of the screen (default).

Top:

Top of the screen.

■

Language

This setting determines the language used for the

onscreen setup menus. You can select: English, German,

French, Spanish, Italian, Dutch, Swedish, or Japanese.

12V Trigger A/B/C Setup

See “Using the 12V Triggers” on page 114.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 105 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

106

Advanced Setup

—Continued

This section explains items on the Hardware menu.

Note:

• This procedure can also be performed on the AV con-

troller by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow

buttons.

Remote Control

■

Remote ID

When several Onkyo components are used in the same

room, their remote ID codes may overlap. To differenti-

ate the AV controller from the other components, you

can change its remote ID from 1, the default, to 2 or 3.

Note:

• If you do change the AV controller’s remote ID, be

sure to change the remote controller to the same ID

(see below), otherwise, you won’t be able to control it

with the remote controller.

Changing the Remote Controller’s ID

Zone 2 and Zone 3

See “Zone 2 and Zone 3” on page 109.

Hardware Setup

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE

MODE button, followed by the

[SETUP] button.

The main menu appears onscreen.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “7. Hardware

Setup,” and then press [ENTER].

The Hardware Setup menu appears.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select an item, and

then press [ENTER].

The screen for that item appears.

INPUT SELECTOR

ON STANDBY

DISPLAY MUTING

DIMMER

CDR/MD

SAT

TAPE/AMP

SLEEP

MACRO

REMOTE MODE

---

10 11 12

TV CH

TV VOL

PLAYLIST

RANDOM

DVD

AUX1AUX

GAME/TV

CBL/SATVCR/DVR

D. TUN

TUNER

TAPE

PHONO

REC

ENTER

VOL

DISC

ALBUM

VCR

CABLE DOCK

DVD

RECEIVER

123

ZONE

INPUT

+10 0

CLEAR

123

456

789

SETUP

RECEIVER

INPUT

ENTER

Number

buttons

Remote

indicator

RECEIVER

ENTER

7.Hardware Setup

1.Remote Control

2.Zone2/Zone3

3.Tuner

4.Analog Multich

5.HDMI

ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select an item, and

use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]

buttons to change it.

The items are explained below.

When you’ve ﬁnished, press the

[SETUP] button.

Setup closes.

While holding down the

[RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE but-

ton, press the TV [INPUT] button.

The Remote indicator ﬂashes four

times.

Use the number buttons to enter

ID 1, 2, or 3.

The Remote indicator ﬂashes twice.

ENTER

RECEIVER

DVD

CBL/SATVCR/DVR

123

PR-SC885_En.book Page 106 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

107

Advanced Setup

—Continued

Tuner

■

Satellite Radio

If you connect an XM Satellite Radio antenna or SIRIUS

Satellite Radio antenna to the AV controller (both sold

separately), set this setting to XM or SIRIUS respec-

tively. If you connect both types of antenna, select

XM/SIRIUS. Otherwise, select None. See the separate

Satellite Radio Guide for more information.

Analog Multich

■

Subwoofer Input Sensitivity

Some DVD players output the LFE channel from their

analog subwoofer output at 15 dB higher than normal.

With this setting, you can change the AV controller’s

subwoofer sensitivity to match your DVD player. Note

that this setting only affects signals connected to the AV

controller’s MULTI CH SUBWOOFER jack.

You can select 0 dB, 5 dB, 10 dB, or 15 dB.

If you ﬁnd that your subwoofer is too loud, try the 10 dB

or 15 dB setting.

HDMI

■

HDMI Audio Out

This setting determines whether audio received by an

HDMI input is output by the HDMI outputs. You may

want to change this setting to On if your TV is connected

to an HDMI output and you want to listen to audio from

an HDMI component through your TV’s speakers. Nor-

mally, it should be set to Off.

Off:

HDMI audio is not output (default).

On:

HDMI audio is output.

Notes:

• If On is selected and the signal can be output by the

TV, the AV controller will output no sound through its

speakers.

• When TV Control is enabled, this setting is set to

Auto.

•With some TVs and input signals, no sound may be

output even if On is selected.

•When the HDMI Audio Out setting is set to On, or TV

Control is set to Enable and you’re listening through

your TV’s speakers (see page 37), if you turn up the

AV controller’s volume control, the sound will be out-

put by the AV controller’s speakers. To stop the AV

controller’s speakers producing sound, change the set-

tings, change your TV’s settings, or turn down the AV

controller’s volume.

■

Lip Sync

The Lip Sync function can automatically synchronize

HDMI audio and video that’s gotten out of sync due to

the complex digital video processing being performed by

your HDMI-compatible TV. With HDMI Lip Sync, the

audio delay required to synchronize the audio and video

is calculated and applied automatically by the AV con-

troller.

Disable:

HDMI lip sync disabled.

Enable:

HDMI lip sync enabled.

Notes:

• This function works only if your HDMI-compatible

TV supports HDMI Lip Sync.

•You can check the amount of delay being applied by

the HDMI Lip Sync function on the A/V Sync screen

(see page 102).

■

xvYCC

If your HDMI source and HDMI-compatible TV both

support the xvYCC color standard, you can enable

xvYCC color on the AV controller with this setting.

Disable:

xvYCC color disabled.

Enable:

xvYCC color enabled.

■

Control

This function allows CEC-compatible components or

RIHD-compatible components connected via HDMI to

be controlled with the AV controller.

Disable:

HDMI Control disabled.

Enable:

HDMI Control enabled.

Notes:

• HDMI control works only with the HDMI OUT

MAIN jack, not the HDMI OUT SUB jack.

•Select Disable if a connected component is incompat-

ible or you’re not sure about its compatibility.

• If operation is unreliable when set to Enable, select

Disable instead.

•When the HDMI Audio Out setting is set to On, or TV

Control is set to Enable and you’re listening through

your TV’s speakers (see page 37), if you turn up the

AV controller’s volume control, the sound will be out-

put by the AV controller’s speakers. To stop the AV

controller’s speakers producing sound, change the set-

tings, change your TV’s settings, or turn down the AV

controller’s volume.

Power Control

To link the power functions of CEC-compatible compo-

nents or RIHD-compatible components connected via

HDMI, select Enable.

Disable:

Power Control disabled.

Enable:

Power Control enabled.

Notes:

• The Power Control setting can be set only when the

above Control setting is set to Enable.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 107 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

108

Advanced Setup

—Continued

•HDMI power control only works with HDMI-compat-

ible components that support it and may not work

properly with some components due to their settings

or compatibility.

•When set to Enable, the AV controller consumes more

power.

• When set to Enable, the AV controller enters Ready

mode when set to Standby. Also, the AV controller’s

AC outlets will be on all of the time regardless of

whether the AV controller is set to On or Standby, or

Ready mode in this case.

TV Control

Select Enable to control the AV controller from an

RIHD-compatible TV connected via HDMI.

Disable:

TV Control disabled.

Enable:

TV Control enabled.

Notes:

• Select Disable if your TV is incompatible or you’re

note sure about its compatibility.

•The TV Control setting can be set only when the above

Control and Power Control settings are both set to

Enable.

Network

These settings are for use with home automation equip-

ment and external controllers.

Lock

With this setting, you can protect your settings by lock-

ing the setup menus.

Locked:

Setup menus locked.

Unlocked:

Setup menus unlocked.

When Locked is selected, only this Lock Setup item can

be accessed.

Lock Setup

Note:

• After changing the Control, Power Control, or TV

Control setting, be sure to turn all of your compo-

nents off and then back on again. Refer to the

instruction manuals for your other components.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 108 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

109

Zone 2 and Zone 3

In addition to your main listening room, you can also enjoy playback in two other rooms, or as we call them, Zone 2

and Zone 3. And, you can select a different source for each room.

Zone 2 speakers must be connected to an amp in Zone 2.

Connecting Your Zone 2 Speakers

You can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback in Zone 2 and

a different source to those selected for your main room

and Zone 3.

Hookup

• Use an RCA audio cable to connect the AV control-

ler’s ZONE 2 PRE OUT L/R jacks to an analog audio

input on your Zone 2 amp.

• Use an RCA audio cable to connect the AV control-

ler’s ZONE 2 PRE OUT SW jack to the line input on

a powered subwoofer in Zone 2.

• Connect your Zone 2 speakers to the speaker termi-

nals on your Zone 2 amp.

Note:

•With the default settings, the Zone 2 volume must be

set on the Zone 2 amp. If your Zone 2 amp has no vol-

ume control, set the Zone 2 Out setting to Variable so

that you can set the Zone 2 volume on the AV control-

ler (see page 110).

Zone 2 Video Outputs

The AV controller features a composite video output and

component video output for connection to a TV in

Zone 2, so you can enjoy both audio and video in that

zone.

Hookup

• Use a composite video cable to connect the AV con-

troller’s ZONE 2 OUT V jack to a composite video

input on your Zone 2 TV.

•Alternatively, use a component video cable to connect

the AV controller’s COMPONENT VIDEO MONI-

TOR OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT jacks to a component

video input on your Zone 2 TV.

• If you use the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR

OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT, you must set the Monitor Out2

setting to Zone 2 (see page 45).

Notes:

•The ZONE 2 OUT V jack outputs video from compo-

nents connected to composite video inputs and

S-Video inputs.

• The COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR

OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT outputs video from components

connected to component video inputs.

Connecting Zone 2

LINE INPUT

ZONE 2 ZONE 3

PRE OUT

Main room

Zone 2

Multichannel power amp

Receiver/

integrated amp

AV controller

Powered

subwoofer

ZONE 2

OUT

MONITOR OUT 2

/ZONE 2 OUT

Main room

Zone 2

AV controller

PR-SC885_En.book Page 109 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

110

Zone 2 and Zone 3

—Continued

Zone 3 speakers must be connected to an amp in Zone 3.

Connecting Your Zone 3 Speakers

You can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback in Zone 3 and

a different source to those selected for your main room

and Zone 2.

Hookup

• Use an RCA audio cable to connect the AV control-

ler’s ZONE 3 PRE OUT L/R jacks to an analog audio

input on your Zone 3 amp.

• Use an RCA audio cable to connect the AV control-

ler’s ZONE 3 PRE OUT SW jack to the line input on

a powered subwoofer in Zone 3.

• Connect your Zone 3 speakers to the speaker termi-

nals on your Zone 3 amp.

Note:

•With the default settings, the Zone 3 volume must be

set on the Zone 3 amp. If your Zone 3 amp has no vol-

ume control, set the Zone 3 Out setting to Variable so

that you can set the Zone 3 volume on the AV control-

ler (see page 110).

If you’ve connected your Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers to

an amp with no volume control, set the Zone 2 Out or

Zone 3 Out setting, respectively, to Variable so that you

can set the zone’s volume, balance, and tone on the AV

controller.

Connecting Zone 3

LINE INPUT

ZONE 3

PRE OUT

Main room

Zone 3

Receiver/

integrated amp

AV controller

Powered

subwoofer

Multichannel power amp

Zone 2/Zone 3 Out Settings

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE

MODE button, followed by the

[SETUP] button.

The main menu appears onscreen.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “7. Hardware

Setup,” and then press [ENTER].

The Hardware Setup menu appears.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “2. Zone 2/

Zone 3,” and then press [ENTER].

The Zone 2/Zone 3 screen appears.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “Zone 2 Out” or

“Zone 3 Out,” and use the Left

and Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to

select:

Fixed:

The Zone 2 or Zone 3 volume

must be set on the amp in that

zone.

Variable:

The Zone 2 or Zone 3 vol-

ume can be set on the AV con-

troller.

RECEIVER

ENTER

7-2.Zone2/Zone3

Zone2 Out Fixed

Zone3 Out Fixed

ENTER

PR-SC885_En.book Page 110 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

111

Zone 2 and Zone 3

—Continued

Note:

• This procedure can also be performed on the AV con-

troller by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow

buttons.

This section explains how to use Zone 2 and Zone 3.

Selecting an Input Source for Zones

Notes:

•To select AM, FM, SIRIUS, or XM, press the

[TUNER] input selector button repeatedly.

• Only analog input sources are output by Zone 2 and

Zone 3. Digital input sources are not output. If no

sound is heard when an input source is selected, check

to make sure it’s connected to an analog input.

• While Zone 2 or Zone 3 is on, the Auto Power On/

Standby and Direct Change functions do not

work.

•You cannot select different AM or FM radio stations

for your main room, Zone 2, and Zone 3. The same

AM/FM radio station will be heard in each room.

However, you can select different AM/FM, SIRIUS,

or XM stations. For example, XM for your main room,

SIRIUS for Zone 2, and AM/FM for Zone 3.

Press the [SETUP] button.

Setup closes.

Using Zone 2 and Zone 3

STANDBY/ON

MASTER VOLUME

CDTUNER

TAPECBL/SAT GAME/TV AUX 1 AUX 2VCR/DVR

DVDAUDIO SELPURE AUDIO PHONO DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

STANDBY

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

OFF TONE HDMI OUT

DIGITAL INPUT

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

LEVEL

PHONES POWER

ON OFF

STEREO THX

RT/PTY/TP

MEMORY

LISTENING MODE

TUNING

MODE SETUP

PRESET

TUNING

TUNING RETURN

ENTER

SETUP MIC

VIDEO

S VIDEO DIGITAL

AUX 2 INPUT

AUDIOLR

CLEAR

ZONE3

ZONE2

TONE

OFF

INPUT SELECTOR

LISTENING MODE

ON STANDBY

DISPLAY MUTING

RC-

690

DIMMER

CDR/MD

SAT

TAPE/AMP

SLEEP

MACRO

REMOTE MODE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

REPEAT

PLAY MODE

---

10 11 12

VIDEO OFFOPEN/CLOSE

TV CH

TV VOL

PLAYLIST

RANDOM

DVD

AUX1AUX

GAME/TV

CBL/SATVCR/DVR

D. TUN

TUNER

TAPE

PHONO

VCRVCR DVDDVD HDDHDD

REC

ENTER

TEST TONE

AUDIO SEL

CH SEL

SURR

DIRECT

THX

PURE A

STEREO

LEVEL

L NIGHT

ALL ST

VOL

DISC

ALBUM

VCR

CABLE DOCK

DVD

RECEIVER

123

ZONE

INPUT

+10 0

CLEAR

123

456

789

Re-EQ

ZONE3

ZONE2

MUTING

STANDBY

LEVEL–,

LEVEL+

INPUT

SELECTOR

On the remote controller, press

the [ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3]

REMOTE MODE button.

On the AV controller, press the

[ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3] button.

The ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 indicator

ﬂashes, and the input selector currently

selected for the zone appears on the dis-

play.

On the remote controller, use the

INPUT SELECTOR buttons.

On the AV controller, use the

input selector buttons, or press

the [ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3] button

repeatedly

The input source is selected, the zone is

turned on, the name of the input selec-

tor appears on the display, and the

ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 indicator lights

continuously.

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

ZONE

AV controller

Remote

controller

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

DVD

AUX1AUX

GAME/TV

CBL/SATVCR/DVR

TUNER

TAPE

PHONO

+10

123

456

789

AV controller

Remote

controller

PR-SC885_En.book Page 111 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

112

Zone 2 and Zone 3

—Continued

Turning Off Zones

Adjusting the Volume of Zones

Adjusting the Balance of Zones

On the remote controller, press

the [ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3]

REMOTE MODE button.

On the AV controller, press the

[ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3] button.

The ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 indicator

ﬂashes.

On the remote controller, press

the [STANDBY] button.

On the AV controller, press the

[OFF] button.

The zone is turned off, and the ZONE 2

or ZONE 3 indicator goes off.

On the remote controller, press

the [ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3]

REMOTE MODE button, and then

use the [LEVEL–] and [LEVEL+]

buttons.

On the AV controller, press the

[ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3] button,

press the [LEVEL] button, and

then use the Up [ ] and Down

[] buttons.

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

ZONE

AV controller

Remote

controller

OFF

STANDBY

AV controller

Remote

controller

ZONE

LEVEL LEVEL

AV controller

Remote

controller

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

On the AV controller, press the

[ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3] button.

Press the AV controller’s [TONE]

button repeatedly to select Bal-

ance.

Use the Up [ ] and Down [ ]

buttons to adjust the balance.

You can adjust the balance from 0 in the

center to +10 dB to the right or +10 dB

to the left in 2 dB steps.

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

AV controller

TONE

PR-SC885_En.book Page 112 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

113

Zone 2 and Zone 3

—Continued

Muting Zones

Adjusting the Tone of Zone 2

Notes:

• Zones can also be unmuted by adjusting the volume.

• The tone cannot be adjusted for Zone 3.

•The Zone 2 level, balance, and tone functions have no

effect on the ZONE 2 PRE OUT when the Zone 2 Out

setting is set to Fixed (page 110).

•The Zone 3 level and balance functions have no effect

on the ZONE 3 PRE OUT when the Zone 3 Out set-

ting is set to Fixed (page 110).

On the remote controller, press

the [ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3]

REMOTE MODE button, and then

press the [MUTING] button.

To unmute a zone, on the remote

controller, press the [ZONE 2] or

[ZONE 3] REMOTE MODE button,

and then press the [MUTING] but-

ton again.

On the AV controller, press the

[ZONE 2] button.

Press the AV controller’s [TONE]

button repeatedly to select Bass

or Treble.

Use the Up [ ] and Down [ ]

buttons to adjust the bass or tre-

ble.

You can boost or cut the Bass or Treble

from –10 dB to +10 dB in 1 dB steps.

ZONE

MUTING

ZONE 2

AV controller

TONE

PR-SC885_En.book Page 113 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

114

Zone 2 and Zone 3

—Continued

The 12V triggers A, B, and C can be used to turn on 12V

trigger-capable components automatically when they are

selected as the input source. The triggers can be set so

that they activate when a connected component is

selected as the input source for the main room, Zone 2,

Zone 3, or any combination of rooms.

When triggered, the output from a 12V TRIGGER OUT

goes high (+12 volts, 100 milliamperes max).

Hookup

• Use a miniplug cable to connect the AV controller’s

12V TRIGGER OUT A, B, or C jack to the 12 V trig-

ger input on a connected component.

When several components are turned on simultaneously

by using triggers A, B, and C, depending on the type of

components, a large amount of current may be drawn

momentarily. To prevent this, you can delay trigger sig-

nals A, B, and C individually. Another application for

trigger delay is eliminating the “thump” noise that’s

sometimes heard when a source component is turned on.

Delaying the trigger signal for your power ampliﬁer so

that it’s the last component to be turned on will accom-

plish this.

Using the 12V Triggers

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE

MODE button, followed by the

[SETUP] button.

The main menu appears onscreen.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select

“6. Miscellaneous,” and then

press [ENTER].

The Miscellaneous menu appears.

RS232

DIGITAL

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

REMOTE

CONTROL

IN 1

IN 2

IN IN IN IN

PHONO CD TAPE AUX 1

GAME/TV

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

CBL/SAT

AUX 1 VCR/DVR

VCR/DVR DVD

DVD

GND

IN 2

IN 3

ASSIGNABLE

(DVD)

(CBL/SAT)

(VCR/DVR)

(GAME/TV)

(CD)

OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

ASSIGNABLE

IN 3

IN 2 IN

1(DVD)

MONITOR

OUT 1

OUT IN IN OUT IN IN FRONT FRONTCENTER

SUBWOOFER SUBWOOFER

CENTERSURR SURR

MULTI CH

PRE OUT

SURR BACK SURR BACK

ANTENNA

FM75

MONITOR OUT 2

/ZONE 2 OUT

ZONE 2 ZONE 3

PRE OUT

12V TRIGGER OUT

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

ZONE 2

OUT

HDMI

IN 1IN 2IN 3IN 4

ASSIGNABLE

OUT

MAIN OUT

SUB

ETHERNET

COLD

HOT GND

INPUT

BALANCE R FRONT R FRONT LSURR R CENTER SURR L

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

SURR BACK R

Bi-AMP

BALANCE L

MONO

SURR BACK L

Bi-AMP

COLD

HOTGND

SIRIUS

AC OUTLET

AC INLET

AC 120V

SWITCHED

120W 1A MAX.

60Hz

ANTENNA

HD RADIO

12V TRIGGER OUT

RECEIVER

ENTER

6.Miscellaneous

1.Volume Setup

2.OSD Setup

3.12V Trigger A Setup

4.12V Trigger B Setup

5.12V Trigger C Setup

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “12V Trigger A,

B, or C,” and then press [ENTER].

The 12V Trigger A/B/C Setup screen

appears.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select “Delay,” and use

the Left and Right [ ]/[ ] but-

tons to select: 0 sec, 1 sec, 2 sec,

or 3 sec.

When 0 sec is selected, the trigger sig-

nal is output as soon as the input source

is changed.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select an input source,

and use the Left and Right

[ ]/[ ] buttons to select an

option.

Off

: No trigger signal is output.

A 12-volt trigger signal is output when

the connected component is selected as

the source for:

Main

: Main room.

Zone2

: Zone 2.

Main/Z2

: Main room or Zone 2.

Zone3

: Zone 3.

Main/Z3

:Main room or Zone 3.

Z2/Z3

: Zone 2 or Zone 3.

Main/Z2/Z3

:Main room, Zone 2, or

Zone 3.

When you’ve ﬁnished, press the

[SETUP] button.

Setup closes.

ENTER

6-x.12V Trigger x Setup

Delay 1sec

DVD Main/Zone2

VCR/DVR Main/Zone2

CBL/SAT Main/Zone2

TV/GAME Main/Zone2

AUX1 Main/Zone2

AUX2 Main/Zone2

TAPE Main/Zone2

TUNER Main/Zone2

CD Main/Zone2

PHONO Main/Zone2

ENTER

PR-SC885_En.book Page 114 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

115

Zone 2 and Zone 3

—Continued

To control the AV controller with the remote controller

while you’re in Zone 2 or Zone 3, you’ll need a commer-

cially available multiroom remote control kit for each

zone.

• Multiroom kits are made by Niles and Xantech.

These kits can also be used when there isn’t a clear line

of sight to the AV controller’s remote sensor, such as

when it’s installed inside a cabinet.

Using a Multiroom Kit with Zone 2/3

In this setup, the IR receiver in Zone 2/3 picks up the

infrared signals from the remote controller and feeds

them through to the AV controller in the main room via

the connecting block.

The miniplug cable from the connecting block should be

connected to the AV controller’s IR IN A or B jack, as

shown below. The IR IN A and B jacks are identical. Up

to two IR receivers can be connected.

Using a Multiroom Kit with a Cabinet

In this setup, the IR receiver picks up the infrared signals

from the remote controller and feeds them to the AV con-

troller located in the cabinet via the connecting block.

Using a Multiroom Kit with Other

Components

In this setup, an IR emitter is connected to the AV con-

troller’s IR OUT jack and placed in front of the other

component’s remote control sensor. Infrared signals

received at the AV controller’s IR IN A or B jack are fed

through to the other component via the IR emitter. Sig-

nals picked up by the AV controller’s remote control sen-

sor are not output.

The IR emitter should be connected to the AV control-

ler’s IR OUT jack, as shown below.

Using the Remote Controller in

Zone 2/3 and Multiroom Control Kits

IR IN

A or B

Connecting

block

Remote controller

IR Receiver

Main room Zone 2/3

Signal ﬂow

OUT

From the connecting block

Miniplug cable

AV controller

IR IN

A or B

Connecting

block

Remote controller

IR Receiver

Inside

cabinet

Signal ﬂow

IR OUT

IR IN

A or B

Connecting

block

IR Receiver

Remote controller

Signal ﬂow

IR Emitter

Other component

AV controller

OUT

Remote control

sensor

Other component

Emitter

IR Emitter

Signal ﬂow

Miniplug

Miniplug cable

AV controller

PR-SC885_En.book Page 115 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

116

Controlling Other Components

You can control your other components, including those

made by other manufacturers, with the remote controller.

This section explains how to:

• Enter the remote control code for a component that

you want to control: DVD, TV, VCR, etc.

• Learn commands directly from another component’s

remote controller (see page 119).

• Program the MACRO buttons to perform a sequence

of up to eight remote control actions (see page 120).

To control another component, you must ﬁrst enter that

component’s remote control code to a REMOTE MODE

button. You’ll need to enter a code for each component

that you want to control.

Notes:

• Remote control codes cannot be entered for the

[RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE button.

• The remote control codes provided are correct at the

time of printing but subject to change.

Entering Remote Control Codes

Look up the component’s remote

control code in the separate

Remote Control Codes list.

The codes are organized by category.

INPUT SELECTOR

LISTENING MODE

ON STANDBY

DISPLAY MUTING

RC-

690

DIMMER

CDR/MD

SAT

TAPE/AMP

SLEEP

MACRO

REMOTE MODE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

REPEAT

PLAY MODE

---

10 11 12

VIDEO OFFOPEN/CLOSE

TV CH

TV VOL

PLAYLIST

RANDOM

DVD

AUX1AUX

GAME/TV

CBL/SATVCR/DVR

D. TUN

TUNER

TAPE

PHONO

VCRVCR DVDDVD HDDHDD

REC

ENTER

TEST TONE

AUDIO SEL

CH SEL

SURR

DIRECT

THX

PURE A

STEREO

LEVEL

L NIGHT

ALL ST

VOL

DISC

ALBUM

VCR

CABLE DOCK

DVD

RECEIVER

123

ZONE

INPUT

+10 0

CLEAR

123

456

789

Re-EQ

REMOTE

MODE

RECEIVER

STANDBY

Number

buttons

Remote

indicator

While holding down the REMOTE

MODE button to which you want

to enter the code, press the

[STANDBY] button.

The Remote indicator lights up.

Within 30 seconds, use the num-

ber buttons to enter the 4-digit

remote control code.

The Remote indicator ﬂashes twice.

Press the REMOTE MODE button

again to select the remote con-

troller mode, point the remote

controller at the component, and

check the operation.

If the remote controller doesn’t work as

expected, and several remote codes are

listed, try each one in turn and use the

one that works best.

CDR/MD

SAT

REMOTE MODE

DOCK

VCR

CABLE

DVD

STANDBY

DVD

AUX1AUX

GAME/TV

CBL/SATVCR/DVR

TUNER

TAPE

123

456

789

• The DOCK remote mode can only be used with

the Onkyo RI Dock at this time.

• The [DVD] and [CD] REMOTE MODE buttons

are preprogrammed for use with Onkyo DVD

players and CD players, respectively.

•To control another manufacturer’s CD recorder or

MD recorder, enter the appropriate remote control

code to the [CD] REMOTE MODE button.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 116 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

117

Controlling Other Components

—Continued

Remote Control Codes for Onkyo

Components Connected via

Onkyo components that are connected via are con-

trolled by pointing the remote controller at the AV con-

troller, not the component. This allows you to control

components that are out of view, in a rack, for example.

If you want to control an Onkyo component by pointing

the remote controller directly at it, or you want to control

an Onkyo component that’s not connected via , use

the following remote control codes:

•[DVD] REMOTE MODE button

5001:

Onkyo DVD player without (default)

• [CD] REMOTE MODE button

6001:

Onkyo CD player without (default)

• [MD] REMOTE MODE button

6007:

Onkyo MD recorder without

• [CDR] REMOTE MODE button

6005:

Onkyo CD recorder without

• [DOCK] REMOTE MODE button

6003:

Onkyo DS-A2 RI Dock without (default)

Note:

•If you connect an -capable Onkyo MiniDisc or CD

recorder to the TAPE IN/OUT jacks, for remote oper-

ation to work properly, you must set the Input Display

to MD or CDR, respectively (see page 49).

Resetting the Remote Mode Buttons

You can reset a REMOTE MODE button to its default

remote control code.

You can reset the remote controller to its default settings.

Make sure the Onkyo component is con-

nected with an cable and an analog

audio cable (RCA).

See page 42 for details.

Enter the appropriate remote control code

to the REMOTE MODE button.

•[DVD] REMOTE MODE button

5002:

Onkyo DVD player with

• [CD] REMOTE MODE button

6002:

Onkyo CD player with

• [MD] REMOTE MODE button

6008:

Onkyo MD recorder with

• [CDR] REMOTE MODE button

6006:

Onkyo CD recorder with

• [DOCK] REMOTE MODE button

6004:

Onkyo DS-A1 RI Dock with

See the previous page for how to enter remote

control codes.

Press the REMOTE MODE button, point

the remote controller at the AV controller,

and operate the component.

While holding down the REMOTE

MODE button that you want to

reset, press the TV [ ] button.

The Remote indicator ﬂashes three

times.

Press the REMOTE MODE button

again.

The Remote indicator ﬂashes twice,

indicating that the button has been

reset.

The [DVD] and [CD] REMOTE

MODE buttons are preprogrammed

with remote control codes for control-

ling Onkyo DVD players and CD play-

ers, respectively. When these buttons

are reset, the preprogrammed codes are

restored.

Resetting the Remote Controller

While holding down the

[RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE but-

ton, press the [STANDBY] button.

The Remote indicator ﬂashes ﬁve

times.

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE

MODE button again.

The Remote indicator ﬂashes twice,

indicating that the remote controller

has been reset.

CDR/MD

SAT

REMOTE MODE

DOCK

VCR

CABLE

DVD

CDR/MD

SAT

REMOTE MODE

DOCK

VCR

CABLE

DVD

RECEIVER

STANDBY

RECEIVER

PR-SC885_En.book Page 117 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

118

Controlling Other Components

—Continued

To control another component, point the remote controller at it and use the buttons explained below. (You must select

the appropriate remote controller mode with the REMOTE MODE buttons ﬁrst.) With some components, certain buttons

may not work as expected, and some may not work at all.

■

Controlling a TV

[ON], [STANDBY], TV [ ]*

Set the TV to On or Standby.

Number buttons

Enter numbers.

[CH +/–], TV CH [+]/[–]*

Select channels on the TV.

[PREV CH]

Selects the previous channel.

[TV INPUT]*

Selects the TV’s external inputs.

TV VOL [ ]/[ ]*

Adjust the TV’s volume.

[MUTING]

Mutes the TV.

[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[MENU]/

[ENTER]/[RETURN]

Navigate menus on the TV.

*Buttons marked with an asterisk (*)

are exclusively for controlling a TV

and can be used at any time, regard-

less of the currently selected remote

controller mode.

■

Controlling a VCR

[ON], [STANDBY]

Set the VCR to On or Standby.

Number buttons

Enter numbers.

[CLEAR]

Cancels functions.

[CH +/–]

Selects channels on the VCR.

[PREV CH]

Selects the previous channel.

REC [ ]

Starts recording.

Eject [ ]

Ejects the videocassette.

[], [], [ ], [ ], [ ]

Play, Pause, Stop, Rewind, and

Fast forward.

[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[MENU]/

[ENTER]/[RETURN]

Navigate menus on the VCR.

■

Controlling a Satellite or

Cable Receiver

[ON], [STANDBY]

Set the satellite/cable receiver to

On or Standby.

Number buttons

Enter numbers.

[CLEAR]

Cancels functions.

[CH +/–]

Selects satellite/cable channels.

[PREV CH]

Selects the previous channel.

[GUIDE]

Displays the program guide.

[], []

Rewind and Fast forward.

[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[MENU]/

[ENTER]/[RETURN]

Navigate menus on the satel-

lite/cable receiver.

INPUT SELECTOR

LISTENING MODE

ON STANDBY

DISPLAY MUTING

RC-

690

DIMMER

CDR/MD

SAT

TAPE/AMP

SLEEP

MACRO

REMOTE MODE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

REPEAT

PLAY MODE

---

10 11 12

VIDEO OFFOPEN/CLOSE

TV CH

TV VOL

PLAYLIST

RANDOM

DVD

AUX1AUX

GAME/TV

CBL/SATVCR/DVR

D. TUN

TUNER

TAPE

PHONO

VCRVCR DVDDVD HDDHDD

REC

ENTER

TEST TONE

AUDIO SEL

CH SEL

SURR

DIRECT

THX

PURE A

STEREO

LEVEL

L NIGHT

ALL ST

VOL

DISC

ALBUM

VCR

CABLE DOCK

DVD

RECEIVER

123

ZONE

INPUT

+10 0

CLEAR

123

456

789

Re-EQ

Press [TV] ﬁrst

INPUT SELECTOR

LISTENING MODE

ON STANDBY

DISPLAY MUTING

RC-

690

DIMMER

CDR/MD

SAT

TAPE/AMP

SLEEP

MACRO

REMOTE MODE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

REPEAT

PLAY MODE

---

10 11 12

VIDEO OFFOPEN/CLOSE

TV CH

TV VOL

PLAYLIST

RANDOM

DVD

AUX1AUX

GAME/TV

CBL/SATVCR/DVR

D. TUN

TUNER

TAPE

PHONO

VCRVCR DVDDVD HDDHDD

REC

ENTER

TEST TONE

AUDIO SEL

CH SEL

SURR

DIRECT

THX

PURE A

STEREO

LEVEL

L NIGHT

ALL ST

VOL

DISC

ALBUM

VCR

CABLE DOCK

DVD

RECEIVER

123

ZONE

INPUT

+10 0

CLEAR

123

456

789

Re-EQ

Press [VCR] ﬁrst

INPUT SELECTOR

LISTENING MODE

ON STANDBY

DISPLAY MUTING

RC-

690

DIMMER

CDR/MD

SAT

TAPE/AMP

SLEEP

MACRO

REMOTE MODE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

REPEAT

PLAY MODE

---

10 11 12

VIDEO OFFOPEN/CLOSE

TV CH

TV VOL

PLAYLIST

RANDOM

DVD

AUX1AUX

GAME/TV

CBL/SATVCR/DVR

D. TUN

TUNER

TAPE

PHONO

VCRVCR DVDDVD HDDHDD

REC

ENTER

TEST TONE

AUDIO SEL

CH SEL

SURR

DIRECT

THX

PURE A

STEREO

LEVEL

L NIGHT

ALL ST

VOL

DISC

ALBUM

VCR

CABLE DOCK

DVD

RECEIVER

123

ZONE

INPUT

+10 0

CLEAR

123

456

789

Re-EQ

Press [CABLE] (SAT) ﬁrst

PR-SC885_En.book Page 118 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

119

Controlling Other Components

—Continued

The AV controller’s remote controller can learn the com-

mands of other remote controllers. By transmitting, for

example, the Play command from your CD player’s

remote controller, the remote controller can learn it, and

then transmit the exact same command when its Play [ ]

button is pressed in the CD remote mode.

This is useful when you’ve entered the appropriate remote

control code (page 116) but some buttons don’t work as

expected.

Notes:

• The following buttons cannot learn new commands:

REMOTE MODE, MACRO [1], [2], [3], TV CH [+]/[–

], Re-EQ, LIGHT.

•When you want to learn the command from your TV’s

Power button, select the TV remote control mode and

use the remote controller’s [STANDBY] button to learn

the command. In the TV remote control mode, the

remote controller’s [STANDBY] and TV [ ] but-

tons are linked, so using the [STANDBY] button to

learn the command will mean that you can also use the

TV [ ] button to turn your TV on or off in TV

remote control mode.

•When you want to learn the commands from your TV’s

Channel Up and Down buttons, select the TV remote

control mode and use the remote controller’s CH [+/–]

button (left to the [ENTER] button) to learn the com-

mands. In the TV remote control mode, the remote con-

troller’s CH [+/–] and TV CH [+]/[–] buttons are linked,

so using the CH [+/–] button to learn these commands

will mean that you can also use the TV CH [+]/[–] but-

tons to change channels in TV remote control mode.

•The remote controller can learn approximately 70 to 90

commands, although this will be less if commands that

use a lot of memory are learned.

• Remote controller buttons such as Play, Stop, Pause,

and so on are preprogrammed with commands for con-

trolling Onkyo CD players, cassette decks, and DVD

players. However, they can learn new commands, and

you can restore the preprogrammed commands at any

time by resetting the remote controller (see page 117).

•To overwrite a previously learned command, repeat this

procedure.

• Only commands from infrared remote controllers can

be learned.

• When the remote controller’s batteries expire, all

learned commands will be lost and will have to be

learned all over again, so don’t discard your other

remote controllers.

Learning Commands

While holding down the REMOTE

MODE button for the mode in

which you want to use the com-

mand, press the [ON] button.

The Remote indicator lights up.

Press the button you want to

learn the new command.

Point the remote controllers at

each other, about 2 to 6 inches

(5–15 cm) apart, and then press

and hold the button whose com-

mand you want to learn until the

Remote indicator ﬂashes.

INPUT SELECTOR

ON STANDBY

DISPLAY MUTING

DIMMER

CDR/MD

SAT

TAPE/AMP

SLEEP

MACRO

REMOTE MODE

---

10 11 12

TV CH

TV VOL

DVD

AUX1AUX

GAME/TV

CBL/SATVCR/DVR

D. TUN

TUNER

TAPE

PHONO

ENTER

VOL

DISC

ALBUM

VCR

CABLE DOCK

DVD

RECEIVER

123

ZONE

INPUT

+10 0

CLEAR

123

456

789

1, 4

Remote

indicator

CDR/MD

SAT

TAPE/AMP

REMOTE MODE

VCR

CABLE DOCK

DVD

RECEIVER

If the command is learned successfully,

the Remote indicator ﬂashes twice.

To learn more commands, repeat

steps 2 and 3.

Press any REMOTE MODE button

when you’ve ﬁnished.

POWER SLEEP DIMMER SUR

MODE

VIDEO-1 VIDEO-2

TAPE

DVD C D

C D DVD

TUNER

PHONO

INPUT SELECTOR

DISC

TAPE

VOLUME

EVEL

CH SEL

PRESET

MUTING

TEST

TONE

MULTI-CH

INPUT

GROUP

--/---1112

REMOTE MODE

ZONE2

DVD

VCR CD

ZONE3

RECEIVER

CABLE

DOCK

TAPE/AMP

SAT

CDR/MD

V CH

V VOL

SLEEP

INPUT SELECTOR

MACRO

10 0

CLEAR

D.TUN

123

456

789

INPUT

ONSTANDBYT

TAPE

DVD

DCR/DVRCBL/SAT

AUX1

AUX2

TUNER

PHONO

GAME/TV

About 2 to 6

inches (5–15 cm)

RC-690M

PR-SC885_En.book Page 119 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

120

Controlling Other Components

—Continued

You can program the remote controller’s MACRO but-

tons to perform a sequence of remote control actions.

Example:

To play a CD you typically need to perform the follow-

ing actions:

1. Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE button

to select the RECEIVER remote controller mode.

2. Press the [ON] button to turn on the AV controller.

3. Press the [CD] INPUT SELECTOR button to

select the CD input source.

4. Press the [CD] REMOTE MODE button to select

the CD remote controller mode.

5. Press the Play [ ] button to start playback on the

CD player.

You can program a MACRO button so that all ﬁve

actions are performed with just one button press.

Making Macros

Each MACRO button can store one macro, and each

macro can contain up to eight commands.

Note:

• If any of the buttons you used to make a macro are

taught new commands, the macro will no longer work

properly and will have to be made again.

Running Macros

Deleting Macros

Using Macros

While holding down the REMOTE

MODE button of the remote con-

troller mode you want to use at

the start of the macro, press

MACRO button [1], [2], or [3].

The Remote indicator lights up.

For the CD example in the left column,

you’d press and hold the [RECEIVER]

REMOTE MODE button, and then

press MACRO button [1], [2], or [3].

INPUT SELECTOR

ON STANDBY

DIMMER

CDR/MD

SAT

TAPE/AMP

SLEEP

MACRO

REMOTE MODE

---

10 11 12

TV CH

TV VOL

DVD

AUX1AUX

GAME/TV

CBL/SATVCR/DVR

D. TUN

TUNER

TAPE

PHONO

ENTER

VOL

DISC

ALBUM

VCR

CABLE DOCK

DVD

RECEIVER

123

ZONE

INPUT

+10 0

CLEAR

123

456

789

RECEIVER

REMOTE

MODE

MACRO

1, 2, 3

Remote

indicator

CDR/MD

SAT

TAPE/AMP

REMOTE MODE

VCR

CABLE DOCK

DVD

RECEIVER

Press the buttons whose actions

you want to program into the

macro in the order you want them

performed.

For the CD example in the left column,

you’d press the following buttons:

[ON], [CD] INPUT SELECTOR, [CD]

REMOTE MODE, Play [ ].

When you’ve ﬁnished, press the

MACRO button again.

The Remote indicator ﬂashes twice.

If you enter eight commands, the pro-

cess will ﬁnish automatically.

Press the MACRO [1], [2], or [3]

button.

The commands in the macro are trans-

mitted in the order in which they were

programmed. Keep the remote control-

ler pointed at the AV controller until all

of the commands have been transmit-

ted.

Macros can be run at any time, regard-

less of the current remote controller

mode.

While holding down the

[RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE but-

ton, press the MACRO button

whose macro you want to delete.

Press the MACRO button again.

RECEIVER

PR-SC885_En.book Page 120 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

121

Troubleshooting

If you have any trouble using the AV controller, look for

a solution in this section. If you can’t resolve the issue

yourself, contact the dealer from whom you purchased

this unit.

Can’t turn on the AV controller

•Make sure that the power cord is plugged into the wall

outlet properly.

• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, wait 5

seconds or more, then plug it back in again.

There’s no sound or it’s very quiet

• Make sure that your multichannel power ampliﬁer is

turned on and set up correctly and connected to the AV

controller properly (page 19).

•Make sure that the digital input is assigned to the input

selector (page 49).

• Make sure that the correct audio input is selected

(page 78).

•Make sure that all audio connecting plugs are pushed

in all the way (page 26).

• Make sure that the polarity of the speaker cables is

correct, and that the bare wire is in contact with the

metal part of each speaker terminal.

• Make sure that the speaker cables are not shorting.

• Check the volume (page 57). The AV controller is

designed for home theater enjoyment and has a wide

volume range for precise adjustment.

• If the MUTING indicator is ﬂashing on the display,

press the remote controller’s [MUTING] button to

unmute the AV controller (page 76).

• While a pair of headphones is connected to the

PHONES jack, no sound is output by the main room

speakers (page 77).

• Check the digital audio output settings on the source

component. On some game consoles, such as those

that can play DVDs, the default setting is off.

•With some DVD-Video discs, you need to select an

audio format from a menu or with the AUDIO button

on your DVD player’s remote controller.

• If your turntable uses an MC cartridge, you must use

an MC head amp or MC transformer (page 39).

• Check the speaker settings (pages 94–99).

•If the digital signal format is set to PCM or DTS, set it

to Auto (page 78).

•If there’s no sound from a DVD player connected to an

HDMI IN, check the DVD player’s output settings,

and be sure to select a compatible audio format.

Only the front speakers produce sound

• When the Stereo listening mode is selected, only the

front speakers and subwoofer produce sound.

• In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers

output sound if the Output Speaker setting is set to L/R

(page 91).

• Check the Speaker Conﬁguration (page 94).

Only the center speaker produces sound

• If you use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie or Dolby

Pro Logic IIx Music listening mode with a mono

source, such as an AM radio station or mono TV pro-

gram, the sound will be concentrated in the center

speaker.

• In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers

output sound if the Output Speaker setting is set to C

(page 91).

• Check the Speaker Conﬁguration (page 94).

The surround speakers produce no sound

• When the Stereo or Mono listening mode is selected,

the surround speakers produce no sound.

• Depending on the source and the current listening

mode, not much sound may be produced by the sur-

round speakers. Try another listening mode (page 79).

• Check the Speaker Conﬁguration (page 94).

The center speaker produces no sound

•When the Stereo listening mode is selected, the center

speaker produces no sound.

• In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers

output sound if the Output Speaker setting is set to L/R

(page 91).

• Check the Speaker Conﬁguration (page 94).

The surround back speakers produce no sound

• The surround back speakers are not used with all lis-

tening modes. Try another listening mode (page 79).

• Not much sound may be produced by the surround

back speakers with some sources.

• Check the Speaker Conﬁguration (page 94).

The subwoofer produces no sound

• If the source material contains no audio in the LFE

channel, the subwoofer produces no sound.

• Check the Speaker Conﬁguration (page 94).

The Zone 2/3 speakers produce no sound

• The Zone 2/3 speakers only output sources that are

connected to an analog input. Check to see if the

source component is connected to an analog input.

Power

Audio

If you can’t resolve the issue yourself, try resetting

the AV controller before contacting the dealer from

whom you purchased this unit.

To reset the AV controller to its factory defaults,

turn it on and, while holding down the [VCR/DVR]

button, press the [STANDBY/ON] button. “Clear”

will appear on the display and the AV controller

will enter Standby mode.

Note that resetting the AV controller will delete your

radio presets and custom settings.

STANDBY/ON

VCR/DVR

PR-SC885_En.book Page 121 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

122

Troubleshooting

—Continued

There’s no sound with a certain signal format

• Check the digital audio output setting on the source

component. On some game consoles, such as those

that can play DVDs, the default setting is off.

•With some DVD-Video discs, you need to select an

audio format from a menu or with the AUDIO button

on your DVD player’s remote controller.

Can’t select the Pure Audio listening mode

• The Pure Audio listening mode cannot be selected

while Zone 2 is on.

The volume cannot be set to +18 dB (99)

• Check to see if a maximum volume has been set

(page 104).

•After the Automatic Speaker Setup function has been

run, or the volume level of each individual speaker has

been adjusted (pages 76 and 98), the maximum vol-

ume may be reduced.

Noise can be heard

• Using cable ties to bundle audio cables with power

cords, speaker cables, and so on can degrade audio

performance, so don’t use them.

• An audio cable may be picking up interference. Try

repositioning your cables.

The Late Night function doesn’t work

• Make sure that the source is Dolby Digital (page 89).

The analog multichannel input doesn’t work

• Check the multichannel input connections (page 31).

• Make sure that the multichannel input is assigned to

the input selector (page 51).

• Make sure that the multichannel input is selected

(page 78).

• Check the audio output settings on your DVD player.

About DTS signals

•When playing DTS program material, using the pause,

fast forward, or fast reverse function on your player

may produce a short audible noise. This is not a mal-

function.

• When DTS program material ends and the DTS bit-

stream stops, the AV controller remains in DTS listen-

ing mode and the DTS indicator remains on. This is to

prevent noise when you use the pause, fast forward, or

fast reverse function on your player. If you switch your

player from DTS to PCM, as the AV controller does

not switch formats immediately, you may not hear

anything, in which case you should stop your player

for about 3 seconds, and then resume playback.

•With some CD players, you won’t be able to playback

DTS material properly even though your player is con-

nected to a digital input on the AV controller. This is

usually because the DTS bitstream has been processed

(e.g., output level, sampling rate, or frequency response

changed) and the AV controller doesn’t recognize it as a

genuine DTS signal. In such cases, you may hear noise.

The beginning of audio received by an HDMI IN

can’t be heard

• Since it takes longer to identify the format of an

HDMI signal than it does for other digital audio sig-

nals, sound may not be output immediately.

There’s no picture

•Make sure that all video connecting plugs are pushed

in all the way (page 26).

•Make sure that each video component is properly con-

nected.

• On your TV, make sure that the video input to which

the AV controller is connected is selected.

• While the Pure Audio listening mode is selected, the

video circuitry is turned off and only the HDMI out-

puts output video signals.

• If your TV is connected to an HDMI output, set the

HDMI Monitor setting to Main or Sub (page 45), and

select “- - -” in the “HDMI Input Setup” on page 47 to

watch composite video, S-Video, and component

video sources.

•If your TV is connected to the COMPONENT VIDEO

MONITOR OUT 1 or COMPONENT VIDEO MON-

ITOR OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT, set the HDMI Monitor

setting to No (page 45), and select “- - -” in the “Com-

ponent Video Input Setup” on page 48 to watch com-

posite video and S-Video sources.

•If the video source is connected to a component video

input, your TV must be connected to the COMPO-

NENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 1, COMPONENT

VIDEO MONITOR OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT, HDMI

OUT MAIN, or HDMI OUT SUB (page 27).

• If the video source is connected to an HDMI input,

your TV must be connected to the HDMI OUT MAIN

or HDMI OUT SUB (page 27).

There’s no picture from a source connected to

an HDMI IN

•When the HDMI Monitor setting is set to No, and the

Resolution setting is set to anything other than

Through (see page 45), no video is output by the

HDMI OUT.

• If the message “Resolution Error” appears on the AV

controller’s display, this indicates that your TV does

not support the current video resolution and you need

to select another resolution on your DVD player.

The onscreen menus don’t appear

• On your TV, make sure that the video input to which

the AV controller is connected is selected.

Reception is noisy, stereo FM reception suffers

from hiss, or the FM STEREO indicator doesn’t

light up

• Relocate your antenna.

•Move the AV controller away from your TV or com-

puter.

• Listen to the station in mono (page 58).

•When listening to an AM station, operating the remote

controller may cause noise.

•Passing cars and airplanes can cause interference.

• Concrete walls weaken radio signals.

• If nothing improves the reception, install an outdoor

antenna.

Video

Tuner

PR-SC885_En.book Page 122 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

123

Troubleshooting

—Continued

The remote controller doesn’t work

•Make sure that the batteries are installed with the cor-

rect polarity (page 13).

• Make sure that the remote controller is not too far

away from the AV controller and there’s no obstruc-

tion between the remote controller and the AV control-

ler’s remote control sensor (page 13).

•Make sure you’ve selected the correct remote control-

ler mode (page 14).

• Make sure you’ve entered the correct remote control

code (page 116).

Can’t control other components

•Make sure you’ve selected the correct remote control-

ler mode (page 14).

• If you’ve connected an -capable Onkyo MD

recorder, CD recorder, or RI Dock to the TAPE

IN/OUT jacks, or an RI Dock to the GAME/TV IN

jacks, for the remote controller to work properly, you

must set the Input Display to MD, CDR, or DOCK,

respectively (see page 49).

•The entered remote control code may not be correct. If

more than one code is listed, try each one.

• If none of the codes work, use the Learning function

to learn the commands of the other component’s

remote controller (page 119).

•With some AV components, certain buttons may not

work as expected, and some may not work at all.

•To control an Onkyo component that’s connected via

, point the remote controller at the AV controller.

Be sure to enter the appropriate remote control code

ﬁrst (page 117).

•To control an Onkyo component that’s not connected

via , or another manufacturer’s component, point

the remote controller at that component. Be sure to enter

the appropriate remote control code ﬁrst (page 116).

Can’t learn commands from another remote

controller

• When learning commands, make sure that the trans-

mitting ends of both remote controllers are pointing at

each other.

• Are you trying to learn from a remote controller that

cannot be used for learning? Some commands cannot

be learned, especially those that contain several

instructions.

Can’t record

• On your recorder, make sure the correct input is

selected.

•To prevent signal loops and damage to the AV control-

ler, input signals are not fed through to outputs with

the same name (e.g., TAPE IN to TAPE OUT or

VCR/DVR IN to VCR/DVR OUT).

•When the Pure Audio listening mode is selected, video

recording is not possible because no video signals are

output. Select another listening mode.

The sound changes when I connect my head-

phones

•When a pair of headphones is connected, the listening

mode is set to Stereo, unless it’s already set to Stereo,

Mono, or Direct, in which case it stays the same.

How do I change the language of a multiplex

source

• On the Audio Adjust menu, change the Multiplex set-

ting to Main or Sub (page 92).

The functions don’t work

•To use , you must make an connection and an

analog audio connection (RCA) between the compo-

nent and AV controller, even if they are connected dig-

itally (page 42).

•While Zone 2 or Zone 3 is selected, the functions

don’t work.

The AV controller’s display doesn’t work

• The display is turned off when the Pure Audio listen-

ing mode is selected. Select another listening mode.

Components connected to the AV controller’s

AC outlets don’t turn on or off when the AV con-

troller is set to On or Standby

• When the HDMI Control setting is set to Enable

(page 107), the AC outlets are on all the time regard-

less of whether the AV controller is set to On or

Standby, or Ready mode in this case, so any compo-

nents connected to them cannot be turned on or off

automatically.

Remote Controller

Recording

Others

The AV controller contains a microcomputer for signal

processing and control functions. In very rare situations,

severe interference, noise from an external source, or

static electricity may cause it to lockup. In the unlikely

event that this happens, unplug the power cord from the

wall outlet, wait at least 5 seconds, and then plug it back

in again.

Onkyo is not responsible for damages (such as CD

rental fees) due to unsuccessful recordings caused by

this unit’s malfunction. Before you record important

data, make sure that the material will be recorded cor-

rectly.

Set the AV controller to Standby before disconnecting

the power cord from the wall outlet.

PR-SC885_En.book Page 123 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

124

Speciﬁcations

Ampliﬁer Section

Video Section

Tuner Section

■

Digital Tuner

General

■

Video Input

■

Video Output

■

Audio Inputs

■

Audio Outputs

■

Control Terminal

Speciﬁcations and features are subject to change without

notice.

THD (Total Harmonic

Distortion) 0.05% (1 Vrms)

Input Sensitivity and

Impedance 200 mV/ 47 k

Ω

(LINE)

2.5 mV/47 k

Ω

(PHONO MM)

Output Level and

Impedance 200 mV/ 470

Ω

(REC OUT)

Phono Overload 70 mV (MM 1 kHz, 0.5%)

Frequency Response 5 Hz–100 kHz/ +1 dB–3 dB (Direct mode)

Tone Control ±10 dB, 20 Hz (BASS)

±10 dB, 20 kHz (TREBLE)

Signal to Noise Ratio 110 dB (LINE, IHF-A)

80 dB (PHONO, IHF-A)

Input Sensitivity/Output

Level and Impedance 1 Vp-p /75

Ω

(Component and S-Video Y)

0.7 Vp-p /75

Ω

(Component Pb/Cb,Pr/Cr)

0.28 Vp-p /75

Ω

(S-Video C)

1 Vp-p /75

Ω

(Composite)

Component Video

Frequency Response 5 Hz – 100 MHz, –3 dB

Tuning Frequency Range

87.5 MHz– 107.9 MHz

Tuning Frequency Range

530 kHz–1710 kHz

XM, SIRIUS, HD RADIO

Preset Channel 40

Power Supply AC 120 V, 60 Hz

Power Consumption: 1.1 A

Dimensions

435

194

448.5 mm

17-1/8"

7-5/8"

17-11/16"

Weight 13.5 kg

29.8 lbs.

HDMI IN 1, IN 2, IN 3, IN 4

Component IN 1 (DVD), IN 2, IN 3

Composite AUX 1, GAME/TV, CBL/SAT,

VCR/DVR, DVD, AUX 2

S-Video AUX 1, GAME/TV, CBL/SAT,

VCR/DVR, DVD, AUX 2

HDMI OUT (MAIN), OUT (SUB)

Component MONITOR OUT 1, MONITOR OUT 2

Composite VCR/DVR OUT, MONITOR OUT

S-Video VCR/DVR OUT, MONITOR OUT

Digital Inputs COAXIAL IN 1, IN 2, IN 3,

OPTICAL IN 1, IN 2, IN 3 (Front)

Analog Inputs PHONO, CD, TAPE, AUX 1, GAME/TV,

CBL/SAT, VCR/DVR, DVD, MULTI CH

(FRONT, CENTER, SUBWOOFER,

SURR, SURR BACK), AUX 2

Balance Inputs BALANCE L, BALANCE R

Multichannel Inputs 7.1 ch

Digital Output OPTICAL (OUT)

Analog Outputs TAPE, VCR/DVR, PRE OUT (FRONT,

CENTER, SUBWOOFER, SURR, SURR

BACK, ZONE 2, ZONE 3)

Balance Pre Outputs FL, FR, C, SL, SR, SBL, SBR, SW

Multichannel Pre

Outputs 7

Subwoofer Pre Outputs 1

Speaker Outputs HDMI MAIN (FL, FR, C, SL, SR, SBL,

SBR, + ZONE 2 (L, R)

Phones PHONES

MIC Yes

RS232 1

Ethernet 1

IR Input/Output 2/1

12 V Trigger Out 3

PR-SC885_En.book Page 124 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

125

Memo

PR-SC885_En.book Page 125 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

126

Memo

PR-SC885_En.book Page 126 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

127

Memo

PR-SC885_En.book Page 127 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

SN 29344463A

I0802-2

Sales & Product Planning Div. : 2-1, Nisshin-cho, Neyagawa-shi, OSAKA 572-8540, JAPAN

Tel: 072-831-8023 Fax: 072-831-8124

ONKYO U.S.A. CORPORATION

18 Park Way, Upper Saddle River, N.J. 07458, U.S.A.

Tel: 201-785-2600 Fax: 201-785-2650 http://www.us.onkyo.com/

ONKYO EUROPE ELECTRONICS GmbH

Liegnitzerstrasse 6, 82194 Groebenzell, GERMANY

Tel: +49-8142-4401-0 Fax: +49-8142-4401-555 http://www.eu.onkyo.com/

ONKYO EUROPE UK Office

Suite 1, Gregories Court, Gregories Road, Beaconsfield, Buckinghamshire, HP9 1HQ

UNITED KINGDOM Tel: +44-(0)1494-681515 Fax: +44(0)-1494-680452

ONKYO CHINA LIMITED

Unit 1&12, 9/F, Ever Gain PlazaTower 1, 88, Container Port Road, Kwai Chung,

N.T., HONG KONG Tel: 852-2429-3118 Fax: 852-2428-9039

http://www.ch.onkyo.com/

http://www.onkyo.com/

HOMEPAGE

* 2 9 3 4 4 4 6 3 A *

PR-SC885_En.book Page 128 Tuesday, February 26, 2008 2:07 PM

Onkyo Pr Sc885 Users Manual SC885_En

Onkyo-Pr-Sc885P-Owner-S-Manual onkyo-pr-sc885p-owner-s-manual

Onkyo-Pr-Sc885-Owner-S-Manual onkyo-pr-sc885-owner-s-manual

PR-SC885 to the manual 94b04901-b199-434b-8436-e1cbc815a8ff

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation